ELMARK has been a registered trademark for Europe since the year of 2000 and is part of the international

company ELMARK HOLDING SC. Our company is licensed for the manufacture of the full range of professional low voltage electrical equipment. The headquarters of ELMARK HOLDING SC are in Varna, Bulgaria. Here is our logistics center which coordinates our activities in Europe and throughout the world. The company ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC, being part of our holding, manages our manufacture, while ELMARK GROUP-BULGARIA LTD, ELMARK GRUP SRL Romania and ELMARK GRUP DOO - Serbia manage our trade activities in the respective countries. Our European factory is located in Bulgaria on an area of 10 000 sq. m. In its storage premises are stored large quantities of all products included in the technical catalogue. It is from here that the goods for Europe and the world are distributed. The facility includes a modern warehouse situated on an area of 5 000 sq.m. which allows us to store considerable quantities that respond to the needs of our clients. The management and the quality management system used for the manufactured products are certified with the issued ISO 9001:2000 certificates, the complete test certificates for CE marking complying with Directive 73/23 EEC and ROHS (Restriction of hazardous Substances) certificates which guarantee the absence of any substances hazardous to the people and the environment. The full three-year warranty period is an additional proof of the quality of the ELMARK products. It is further accompanied by a special international insurance, which guarantees the coverage of damages which may occur as a result from an action or inaction of our products. ELMARK HOLDING SC is represented by distributing companies in Greece, Cyprus, Croatia, Hungary, Macedonia, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Montenegro, Sri Lanka, The Republic of South Africa, Jordan and Iran. The contract negotiations with distributors in France, Israel and Albania are almost finalized. There is a serious interest on the part of Kuwait and the United Arab Emirates. Our successful trade policy results from the high quality of the ELMARK product range and from the successful balance of supply and demand of electrical equipment on competitive prices. As a result, ELMARK HOLDING SC has been a trustworthy and desired partner on the European and world market for seven years.

CONTENTS
www.elmarkgroup.eu

CERTIFICATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 D1 D2 D3 1 E2 3 4 E5 6 7 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60Dc series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Switch disconnectors ISS 63100A series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Isolating switches ISS2 125800A series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A electronic type (MCCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 631250A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES

Residual current devices JVL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JVL5 (RCD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Combined circuit breakers with residual current device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Surge arresters SPD type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors LT 1-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Low voltage contactors LT 1- F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Auxiliary contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Module contactors K series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION

Complex compensating devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Capacitor batteries and cos regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Filters for harmonics and metal boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS

Thermal relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Starters for direct start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Star/delta starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Reverse starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ELM 1000 frequency inverters for conveyor systems control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Frequency inverters EL ZVF9 type for water pumps and fans control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 ELM 2500 soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Programmable timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Digital counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Industrial Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

CONTENTS
www.elmarkgroup.eu
13 14 15 16 17 18 Devices for temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Current measurement transformesr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Voltage transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Displaying measurement devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Manual meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 G1 G2 G3 G4 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Proximity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Capacitive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Photoelectrical sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Rotary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Buttons and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Devices for telpher control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Bases for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Fuse links for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Isolating switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Switch disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS

Industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Static industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Industrial built in contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Distribution boxes with industrial contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

PLASTIC BOXES AND METAL CABINETS FOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 J1 J2 J3 J4 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 Plastic distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Metal distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Module plastic distribution boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Cable support systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Moisture-proof junction boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

INSTRUMENTS
Hydraulic crimping instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Hydraulic piercing instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Mechanical cutting instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Hand instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

CONSUMATIVES AND CABLE TERMINALS

Non-insulated butt terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Non-insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Consumatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Thermal shrinkable tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Multiplugs and cable reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

THERMAL SHRINKABLE TUBES

L1 L2 L3 L4 "RHYME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 "SPLENDOR" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 "BASIC". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 "LIFE STYLE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Certificates of the trade companies Bulgaria, Romania, Serbia

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ISO certificates of ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ROHS certificates
www.elmarkgroup.eu

Test reports with EC directives N 73/23 EEC Low Voltage Directives Issued by Center for testing and European certification
www.elmarkgroup.eu

Notified by the European certificate organization NANDO Brussels (New Approach Notified and Designated Organization) 1871, http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/newapproach/nando

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Bosnia and Herzegovina

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Serbia

www.elmarkgroup.eu

10

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Croatia

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Certificate for international insurance in Alliance IRIND

www.elmarkgroup.eu

11

12

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60

TERMINAL NON-FLAMMABLE COVER JUMP KNUCKLE HANDLE

A1

LOCK KNACKLE MOVABLE CONTACT ARC CHAMBER STATIC CONTACT MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory) UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory) SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)

10

11

12

CHARACTERISTICS Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect electrical circuits from damage caused by overload or short circuit. They can also be used as devices for commutation and control of electrical circuits. They differ in the following characteristics: * Operating voltage: 230, 400V * Number of poles: 1, 2, 3, 4 * Breaking curve: - curve B breaks between 3 and 5 In, used for low voltage short circuit currents (long circuits and generators) - curve C breaks between 5 and 10 In, used for protection of main power supply cables and conventional consumers - curve D breaks between 10 and 20 In, used for protection of industrial consumers with high initial current flow (electric motors) * Breaking capacity: 4.5, 6kA

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60N

Type designation 6xN constructive series number of poles (1;2;3;4) C x rated current breaking curve Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

13

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit - for mounting in housing and industrial buildings - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m - allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating voltage:2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: B the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and generators C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180m - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2 - bimetal plate composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 16 mm2 * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious interference * ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C

A1

Type

Rated current In A

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

Package/Box (pcs)

61N / 1A 61N / 2A 61N / 4A 61N / 6A 61N / 10A 61N / 16A 61N / 20A 61N / 25A 61N / 32A 61N / 40A 61N / 50A 61N / 63A

1 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41100 41102 41104 41106 41110 41116 41120 41125 41132 41140 41150 41163

41501 41502 41504 41506 41510 41516 41520 41525 41532 41540 41550 41563

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

14

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type Rated current In A Breaking capacity (kA)

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60N

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number mounting Curve C Curve B conductors (mm2) Package / Box (pcs)

A1

62N / 2 62N / 4A 62N / 6A 62N / 10A 62N / 16A 62N / 20A 62N / 25A 62N / 32A 62N / 40A 62N / 50A 62N / 63A

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41202 41204 41206 41210 41216 41220 41225 41232 41240 41250 41263

41602 41604 41606 41610 41616 41620 41625 41632 41640 41650 41663

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

Type

Rated current In A

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number mounting Curve C Curve B conductors (mm2)

Package / Box (pcs)

63N/2A 63N/4A 63N / 6A 63N / 10A 63N / 16A 63N / 20A 63N / 25A 63N / 32A 63N / 40A 63N / 50A 63N / 63A

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41302 41304 41306 41310 41316 41320 41325 41332 41340 41350 41363

41702 41704 41706 41710 41716 41720 41725 41732 41740 41750 41763

4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80

Type

Rated current In A

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number mounting Curve C Curve B conductors (mm2)

Package / Box (pcs)

64N / 2A 64N / 4A 64N / 6A 64N / 10A 64N / 16A 64N / 20A 64N / 25A 64N / 32A 64N / 40A 64N / 50A 64N / 63A

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41402 41404 41406 41410 41416 41420 41425 41432 41440 41450 41463

41802 41804 41806 41810 41816 41820 41825 41832 41840 41850 41863

3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60

C60 curve B

C60 curve C

1. Thermal release

1. Thermal release

2. Electromagnetic release

2. Electromagnetic release

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M

Type designation: 100 constructive series; number of poles (1;2;3;4) D x rated current breaking curve ; D

15

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating volatage:2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C,D * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 148 to 230m - welding effort: <400 N/mm2 - bimetal plate composition: TB180/0.5 - thickness: 0.8mm - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: 20N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 6x6x1 - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar 1P100, 3P100 - rigid conductors up to 50 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 35 mm2 * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * possibility for labeling * for mounting in industrial environment * ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C

A1

Poles

Rated current (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve D

Package / Box (pcs)

1P

80 100

10 10

41180 41190

41180D 41190D

9 / 180 9 / 180

16

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Poles Rated current (A)

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)C100M

Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number (kA) Curve C Curve D Package / Box (pcs)

2P

80 100

10 10

41280 41290

41281 41291

6 / 120 6 / 120

A1

Poles

Rated current (A)

Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number (kA) Curve C Curve D

Package / Box (pcs)

3P

80 100

10 10

41380 41390

41381 41391

4 / 60 4 / 60

Poles

Rated current (A)

Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number (kA) Curve C Curve D

Package / Box (pcs)

4P

80 100

10 10

41480 41490

41481 41491

3 / 60 3 / 60

(C Type)
t(s) 1000 5000 2000 1000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0.005 0.002 0.001 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in 1000 5000 2000 1000 500 200 100 50 20 10 t(s)

(D Type)

Thermal release

Thermal release

Electromagnetic release

5 2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0.005 0.002 0.001 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in

Electromagnetic release

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N

Type designation: 4xN constructive series number of poles (1;3) C x rated current breaking curve Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2

17

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit - for mounting in housing and industrial buildings - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post up to 150 m - it allows protection of consumers generating low voltage short circuit currents to 4500 A Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 4500A * Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu * Insulating voltage: 2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of commutation cycles): 4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of commutation cycles): 20000 * Class of current limiting: 3 * IP code: IP20 * Breaking curve: C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180m - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2 - bimetal plate composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting): - power supply busbar 1P63,3P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 16 mm2 * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm Mounting * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious interference * Ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2C

A1

Type

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package / Box (pcs)

C41N / 6A C41N / 10A C41N / 16A C41N / 20A C41N / 25A C41N / 32A C41N / 40A C41N / 50A C41N / 63A

6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41459

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

18

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type Rated current In (A) Breaking capacity (kA)

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2) Catalogue number Curve C Package / Box (pcs)

C43N / 6A C43N / 10A C43N / 16A C43N / 20A C43N / 25A C43N / 32A C43N / 40A C43N / 50A C43N / 63A

6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41541 41542 41543 41544 41545 41546 41547 41548 41549

4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80

A1

C45 Curve B

C45 Curve C

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N)

19

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - it breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead conductor Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A * Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu * Insulating voltage: 2000V * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - power supply busbar DP1N - flexible or rigid conductor * Mounting: on DIN-rail

A1

Type

Rated current

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package / Box (pcs)

DP1N / 6 DP1N / 10 DP1N / 16 DP1N / 20 DP1N / 25 DP1N / 32

6 10 16 20 25 32

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0

41006 41010 41016 41020 41025 41032

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

20

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60Dc series

A1

Functions: - for lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of the breaker at constant current consumer protection 6xDC constructive series - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating current and constant number of poles (1;2;3;4) current power supply circuits Cx rated current - for commutation and control of electrical circuits breaking curve - in combination with auxiliary alternating current devices for remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit Documents corresponding to - for mounting in industrial buildings the product: - for protection of consumers generating short circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current power supply Standard EN60898-1 Technical data: EN 60898-2 * Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC * Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu * Insulating voltage: 2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 20000 * Class of current limiting: 3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 A * Plastic box not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180m - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2 - bimetal plate composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24m - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) - metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant current arc * Conducting: - power supply busbar 1P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 16 mm2 * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm Mounting * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious current interference * Ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series

Type Breaking capacity (kA) Rated current In (A) Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2) Catalogue number Curve C

21

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Package/Box (pcs)

C61DC

61DC / 1A 61DC / 2A 61DC / 4A 61DC / 6A 61DC / 10A 61DC / 16A 61DC / 20A 61DC / 25A 61DC / 32A 61DC / 40A 61DC / 50A 61DC / 63A

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41164 41165 41166 41167 41168 41169 41170 41171 41172 41173 41174 41175

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

A1

72 65 36 18 49

5 78 45

Type

Breaking capacity (kA)

Rated current In (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package/Box (pcs)

C62DC

62DC / 2A 62DC / 4A 62DC / 6A 62DC / 10A 62DC / 16A 62DC / 20A 62DC / 25A

6 6 6 6 6 6 6

2 4 6 10 16 20 25

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0

41176 41177 41178 41179 41181 41182 41183

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

22

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers

Combined voltage circuit-breaker N2 Functions: - when the voltage is reduced below 170V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off - when the voltage is increased above 270V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off - allows manual turning on of the switch after powering is restored - indication of the position of the device Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Insulation voltage: 2000V * Protection ratio: IP>20 Connection method: * Double connector: flat (tunnel) screw connector * Feeding (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 * Tightening moment of the screw: 1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical, by means of two pins attached to the rivets of the circuit-breaker, while the operating mechanism is connected to the switching off mechanism of the circuit breaker after the sealing lid is demounted * DIN rail * for mounting in industrial places Environmental temperature : -5 +402
Type Rated voltage Catalogue number Package/Box (pcs)

A1
Type designation: N - constructive series number of poles - 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

Type designation: X - constructive series number of poles - 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

Shunt release MX (independent release) Functions: - remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed - allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery - indication of the device's location Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * IP code: IP>20 Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * The power supply of the release is accomplished at the outlet of the breaker Mounting: * vertical, clamps with two pins to the breaker's rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover * DIN- rail * mounting in industrial environment: * ambient temperature: -5C to + 40C2 C
Type Rated voltage Catalogue number Package / Box (pcs)

ELMARK MN2

230V

41909

8 / 160

ELMARK MX

230V

41902

8 / 160

Isolated mounting terminal for circuit breakers Functions: - provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm2 to power supply busbar - provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker - provides enough contact surface of the conductor Technical data: * Brass alloy with galvanic cover * Fabric isolated with plastic cover * Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables * Rated voltage: 230V * Rated current: up to 63A * Isolating voltage: 500V * IP code: IP>20 * Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm2 Connecting: * to the joining terminal of the breaker

Type

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Rated current In (A)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

TB 25

2.5 35

63

31025

20 / 500

Circuit breakers Auxiliary contact OF

23

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Auxiliary contact OF Functions: -at circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the control or signalization system -indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and the breaker Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Ingress protecting rating: IP>20 Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical, clamps with two pins to breaker's rivets, and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover * DIN- rail * mounting in industrial environment * ambient temperature: -5 t +402
Type Rated voltage Circuit breaker type Catalogue number Box / Carton (pcs)

A1

Type designation: OF constructive series number of poles 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

ELMARK OF ELMARK SD100

230V 230V

C40, C60 C100

41901 41909

12 / 240 12 / 240

Power supply busbar Functions: -enables the supply of a group of conductors -provides simultaneous supply -conducting section electrotechnical copper -insulation of the conducting section Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V * Isolating voltage: 500V * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960 * Rated current (phase): 63/100A Connecting: * to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type (copper busbar) Length (m) Poles (number) In with one point of power supply In with two points of power supply Catalogue number Package / Box (pcs)

1P 63 1P 100 2P 63 3P 63 3P 100 DP 1N

1 1 1 1 1 1

55 55 28 18 18 56

63 100A 63A 63 100A 63A

90 120A 90A 90 120A 90A

14163 14190 14263 14363 14390 14463

10 / 100 10 / 100 8 / 50 6 / 30 5 / 20 8 / 48

Mounting (DIN) rail Functions: -serves for mounting breakers, residual current devices, contactors and other elements -provides a firm clamp of the elements Technical data: * brass alloy with galvanic cover * factory drilled mounting openings * length up to 1m Connecting: - with bolts or other fixing elements to the mounting surface

Length (m) Catalogue number

1m 14001

Package / Box (pcs) 20 / 100

24

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-3 IEC947-3 ROHS sertificate: 06111803L0811

Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors ISS 63100A series

Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits - can be used as a main breaker - short circuit current wear resistance in the protected circuit Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or flexible conductors * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * Isolating voltage: 500V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: DIN-rail * Plastic material of UV rays * Ambient temperature: -20C + 55C
Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

A2

Poles

Rated current (A)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

1P

63 80 100

16 25 35

41911 41912 41913

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

Poles

Rated current (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

2P

63 80 100

16 25 35

41921 41922 41923

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

Poles

Rated current (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

3P

63 80 100

16 25 35

41931 41932 41933

4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80

Poles

Rated current (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

4P

63 80 100

16 25 35

41941 41942 41943

3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60

Circuit breakers Isolating switches ISS2 125800A series

25

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 The devices are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

The series load isolating switch ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection. Functions: - switching on and off of electrical circuits under load - disconnection of electrical circuits - used as main circuit-breaker - resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit Technical features: * Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz * Double connector: screw connection * Connection: solid or flexible conductors * Insulation voltage: 1000V * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 * Protection ratio: IP>20 * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts * Plastic resistant to UV raysPlastic resistant to UV rays * Ambient temperature: -2040

A2

Dimensions
Type A B D E J J1 K R S T Y

ISS2-125 140 135 125 ISS2-160 140 135 125 ISS2-250 180 170 138 MG2-400 230 240 165 MG2-630 230 260 165 MG2-800 378 312 240

27 27 35 50 50 50

73 73 86

120 120 120 120 160 160

65 65 90

20 20 25 32 40 60

25 25 30 40 50 56

3.5 3.5 3.5 5 6 8

25 25 25 37 37 48

110 210 210 140 110 210 210 140 140 353 353 175

Type

Rated current In(A)

Maximum breaking capacity Icu(A)

Tightening moment (Nm)

Catalogue number

Box / carton (pcs)

ISS2-125in ISS2-125out ISS2-160in ISS2-160out ISS2-250in ISS2-250out ISS2-400in ISS2-630in ISS2-800in

125 125 160 160 250 250 400 630 800

1250 1250 1250 1250 2000 2000 3200 4000 1000

6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 10 10 14.5 14.5 27

41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957 41958 41959

1 / 12 1 / 12 1 / 12 1 / 12 1/6 1/6 1/2 1/2 1/2

Note: ISS2-xxx in load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board ISS2 -xxx out load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the board

26

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Circuit breakers Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800

The series load isolating switch EQ 2 M xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, manual switching between two power supplies or switching ON of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection. Functions: - switching on and off of low voltage electrical circuits under load - disconnection of the electrical circuit from one of the power supplies, while providing immediately switching to the other - used as main switch - resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz * Double connector: screw connection * Connection: hard or flexible conductors * Insulation voltage: 1000V * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 * Protection ratio: IP>20 * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts * Plastic resistant to UV rays * Ambient temperature: -2040 * Option for moving the handle on the front panel of the board * Small size * Indication which of the two supplies is operating

A2
Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 The devices are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Dimensions
Type A B D E J J1 K R S T Y

Q2M-160 270 135 212 104 150 120 120

95

20 25 32 40 60

25 30 40 50 56

3.5 3.5 5 6 8

25 25 37 37 48

Q2M-250 307 170 260 110 180 160 160 115 Q2M-400 372 240 297 150 236 210 210 180 Q2M-630 372 240 297 150 236 210 210 180 Q2M-800 372 240 297 150 236 353 353 180

Type

Rated current In(A)

Maximum breaking capacity

Icu(A)

Tightening moment (Nm)

Catalogue number

Box / carton (pcs)

Q2M-160 Q2M-250 Q2M-400 Q2M-630 Q2M-800

160 250 400 630 800

1250 2000 3200 4000 1000

6.5 10 14.5 14.5 27

44641 44642 44643 44644 44645

1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A

27

www.elmarkgroup.eu

A3

13

14

13

15

16

COVER TERMINALS NON-FLAMABLE BASE STATIC CONTACTS PART FROM THE COVER SCREWS FOR TERMINALS ARC CHAMBERS ELEMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT

TERMINAL PLASTIC PLATE CONTACTS WITH BIMETAL PLATES THERMAL SYSTEM WITH MOVABLE CONTACTS UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE - UVR (accessory)

13 14 15 16

REMOTE CONTROL electrical (accessory) AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory) SHUNT RELEASE (accessory) REMOTE CONTROL manual (accessory)

28

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A
Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 8000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal for the breakers up to 160A and a bolt connection for the breakers from 250A to 1600A * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Plastic elements - not keeping the burning material nylon PA66 - box permitivity strength: >16MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C * Static contacts alloy: pure copper T2Y2 - contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) - thickness: depends on the current * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -2055
Overall dimensions (mm)

A3

H H1

e d

L2

A W1 W

Type

Installation dimensions (mm)

W DS1-125 DS1-160 DS1-250 DS1-400 DS1-630 DS1-800 DS1-1600 76.2 90 105 140 210 210 210

L 120 120 170 257 275 275 410

H 70 70 104 104 104 104 140

L1

H1 90 93

A 25 30 35 44 70 70 70

B 100 100 139 214 230 230 300

W1 50 60 70 87.5 140 140 140

L2

d 4 5

238 316 310 347 410

143.5 144 172 172 210

210 285 280 307 350

6 6 6 6 10

8.5 11 11 16 12

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

Maximum breaking capacity ()Icu

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

400V 25 25 25 25 25 25

690V 10 10 10 10 10 10 fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed 16 16 25 25 35 50 44040 44050 44063 44080 44090 44125 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20

DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125 DS1-125

40 50 63 80 100 125

16 16 16 16 16 16

L1

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A
Type Rated current In (A) Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics
Maximum breaking capacity ()Icu

29

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Thermal current adjustment (A) Section of the conductor (mm2) Catalogue number Package / Box (pcs)

400V DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160 100 160 16 22 25 35

690V 10 15 70 - 100 112 - 160 50 70 44165 44160 1 / 16 1 / 16

A3

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

Maximum breaking capacity ()Icu

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

400V DS1 - 250 DS1 - 250 200 250 35 35 50 50

690V 15 15 140 - 200 175 - 250 120 120 44200 44250 1/6 1/6

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

Maximum breaking capacity ()Icu

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

400V DS1 - 400 DS1 - 400 400 400 50 50 65 65

690V 25 25 320 - 400 fixed 240 240 44400 44401 1/3 1/3

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

Maximum breaking capacity ()Icu

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

400V DS1 - 630 DS1 - 630 500 630 65 65 75 75

690V 25 25 fixed fixed 2 x 185 2 x 185 44500 44630 1/2 1/2

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

Maximum breaking capacity ()Icu

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

400V DS1 - 800 800 75 85

690V 30 fixed 2 x 240 44800 1/2

30

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2 ROHS sertificate: A07082429F2801

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A electronic type (MCCB)

Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics The breakers are in accordance - control: manual with the directives of EC Low - possibilities for electrical module parameters adjustment through direct modules (combination of keys) thus providing voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 accurate protection from overload and short circuit EEC and Electromagnetic - simultaneous protection of the three phases - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation Compatibility Directives (EMC) - contactor for TT test 15V DC A3 no. 89/336 EEC. Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 8000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960C * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -2055
L 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 1 A B C D 3S 6S 12S 18S OFF 1.5 2 4 6 8 10 I TEST 15V dc l3 In=~630A o+ oXl1 t

l1

xln

t1 t1 l=6l1 I1 I3

Protecting functions: Function L step adjustment for protection against overload. Adjustment of the operating current I1=0.4+1xIn with discreet coefficients as the value can be 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 0.95 and 1 Time delay adjustment t1 of the protection against overload step adjustment with four values A-3s; B-6s; C-12s; D-18s when current is I=6I1. The diagram of the current curves is presented on fig.1 Adjustment of the transitory protection current against short circuit I3=X x I1 where X can take discreet value OFF; 1.5; 2; 4; 6; 8; 10
Type Rated current In (A) Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics
Maximum breaking capacity ()Icu

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

400V 65 75 75 85 85 85

690V 25 25 30 50 50 50 160 - 400 252 - 630 320 - 800 400 - 1000 500 - 1250 640 - 1600 240 2x185 2x240 2x240 2x240 2x240 44940 44963 44980 44999 44925 44960 1/3 1/2 1/2 1/1 1/1 1/1

DS1-400/3300 DS1-630/3300 DS1-800/3300 DS1-1250 DS1-1250 DS1-1600

400 630 800 1000 1250 1600

50 65 65 75 75 75

Fig.1

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)

31

www.elmarkgroup.eu

According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices can be divided into two groups: - internal devices accessories for whose mounting it is necessary to dismount the cover of the breakers and fix them in specially designed jacks - external devices they are mounted right on the top cover of the breaker INTERNAL DEVICES Auxiliary contact (OF) The device changes its condition conformably to the breaker's condition; it has a NO and a NC contactor. Technical data: - for breakers up to 160A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 3A - for breakers from 250 to 800A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 6A - available joining conductors - labeling of the cables Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Documentation corresponding Connecting: to the product: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2 The devices are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
Type of the breaker Catalogue number Type of the breaker Catalogue number Type of the breaker Catalogue number

A3

DS1 125/40+OF DS1 125/50+OF DS1 125/63+OF DS1 125/80+OF DS1 125/100+OF DS1 125/125+OF

44301 44302 44303 44304 44305 44306

DS1 160/160+OF DS1 250/200+OF DS1 250/250+OF DS1 400/400+OF DS1 630/500+OF DS1 630/630+OF

44307 44308 44309 44310 44311 44312

DS1 800/800+OF DS1 1600/1000+OF DS1 1600/1250+OF DS1 1600/1600+OF

44313 44314 44315 44316

Shunt release (MX) The device is used for remote control of breakers as at voltage signal it starts operating and switches off the breaker to which it is mounted Technical data: - rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz - electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A - electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A - available joining conductors Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Connecting : Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V)) Catalogue number Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V) Catalogue number Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V) Catalogue number

DS1 125/40+MX DS1 125/40+MX DS1 125/40+MX+OF DS1 125/40+MX+OF DS1 125/50+MX DS1 125/50+MX DS1 125/50+MX+OF DS1 125/50+MX+OF DS1 125/63+MX DS1 125/63+MX DS1 125/63+MX+OF DS1 125/63+MX+OF DS1 125/80+MX DS1 125/80+MX DS1 125/80+MX+OF DS1 125/80+MX+OF DS1 125/100+MX DS1 125/100+MX DS1 125/100+MX+OF DS1 125/100+MX+OF DS1 125/125+MX DS1 125/125+MX DS1 125/125+MX+OF DS1 125/125+MX+OF DS1 160/160+MX DS1 160/160+MX

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44317 44318 44319 44320 44321 44322 44323 44324 44326 44327 44328 44330 44331 44332 44334 44335 44336 44337 44338 44339 44340 44341 44342 44343 44333 44344

DS1 160/160+MX+OF DS1 160/160+MX+OF DS1 250/200+MX DS1 250/200+MX DS1 250/200+MX+OF DS1 250/200+MX+OF DS1 250/250+MX DS1 250/250+MX DS1 250/250+MX+OF DS1 250/250+MX+OF DS1 400/400+MX DS1 400/400+MX DS1 400/400+MX+OF DS1 400/400+MX+OF DS1 630/500+MX DS1 630/500+MX DS1 630/500+MX+OF DS1 630/500+MX+OF DS1 630/630+MX DS1 630/630+MX DS1 630/630+MX+OF DS1 630/630+MX+OF DS1 800/800+MX DS1 800/800+MX DS1 800/800+MX+OF DS1 800/800+MX+OF

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44345 44346 44347 44348 44349 44350 44351 44352 44353 44354 44355 44356 44357 44358 44359 44360 44361 44362 44363 44364 44365 44366 44367 44368 44369 44370

DS1 1250/1000+MX DS1 1250/1000+MX DS1 1250/1000+MX+OF DS1 1250/1000+MX+OF DS1 1250/1250+MX DS1 1250/1250+MX DS1 1250/1250+MX+OF DS1 1250/1250+MX+OF DS1 1600/1600+MX DS1 1600/1600+MX DS1 1600/1600+MX+OF DS1 1600/1600+MX+OF DS1 400/3300+MX DS1 400/3300+MX DS1 400/3300+MX+OF DS1 400/3300+MX+OF DS1 630/3300+MX DS1 630/3300+MX DS1 630/3300+MX+OF DS1 630/3300+MX+OF DS1 800/3300+MX DS1 800/3300+MX DS1 800/3300+MX+OF DS1 800/3300+MX+OF

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44371 44372 44373 44374 44375 44376 44377 44378 44379 44380 44381 44382 44451 44452 44453 44454 44455 44456 44457 44458 44459 44460 44461 44462

32

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)
Under voltage release (MN) The device switches off and/or does not allow the switching on of the breaker to which it is mounted at power breakdown or voltage decrease under certain limits Technical data: - operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz - electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A - electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A - available joining conductors - switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the operating Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Connecting: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V) Catalogue number Type of the breaker Operating voltage (V) Catalogue number

A3

DS1 - 250-800

DS1 - 125-160

DS1 125/40+MN DS1 125/40+MN DS1 125/40+MN+OF DS1 125/40+MN+OF DS1 125/50+MN DS1 125/50+MN DS1 125/50+MN+OF DS1 125/50+MN+OF DS1 125/63+MN DS1 125/63+MN DS1 125/63+MN+OF DS1 125/63+MN+OF DS1 125/80+MN DS1 125/80+MN DS1 125/80+MN+OF DS1 125/80+MN+OF DS1 125/100+MN DS1 125/100+MN DS1 125/100+MN+OF DS1 125/100+MN+OF DS1 125/125+MN DS1 125/125+MN DS1 125/125+MN+OF DS1 125/125+MN+OF DS1 160/160+MN DS1 160/160+MN DS1 160/160+MN+OF DS1 160/160+MN+OF DS1 250/200+MN DS1 250/200+MN DS1 250/200+MN+OF DS1 250/200+MN+OF

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44383 44384 44385 44386 44387 44388 44389 44390 44391 44392 44393 44394 44395 44396 44397 44398 44399 44402 44405 44406 44407 44408 44409 44410 44411 44412 44413 44414 44415 44416 44417 44418

DS1 250/250+MN DS1 250/250+MN DS1 250/250+MN+OF DS1 250/250+MN+OF DS1 400/400+MN DS1 400/400+MN DS1 400/400+MN+OF DS1 400/400+MN+OF DS1 630/500+MN DS1 630/500+MN DS1 630/500+MN+OF DS1 630/500+MN+OF DS1 630/630+MN DS1 630/630+MN DS1 630/630+MN+OF DS1 630/630+MN+OF DS1 800/800+MN DS1 800/800+MN DS1 800/800+MN+OF DS1 800/800+MN+OF DS1 1250/1000+MN DS1 1250/1000+MN DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF DS1 1250/1250+MN DS1 1250/1250+MN DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF DS1 1600/1600+MN DS1 1600/1600+MN DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44419 44420 44421 44422 44423 44424 44425 44426 44427 44428 44429 44430 44431 44432 44433 44434 44435 44436 44437 44438 44439 44440 44441 44442 44443 44444 44445 44446 44447 44448 44449 44450

EXTERNAL DEVICES Remote control (manual) Description: The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted - two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90C Mounting: The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at the door of the distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base

scheme 1 Table with the dimensions for manual remote control Type of the breaker Type Catalogue number Package (pcs) Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) A B C Dmin Dmax

DS1 125A DS1 160A DS1 250A DS1 400A DS1 630A DS1 800A

ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC

44967 44968 44969 44970 44971 44972

1 1 1 1 1 1

HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1

125A 160A 250A 400A 630A 800A

25 30 35 45 70 70

50 50 70 107 119 119

50 50 70 107 119 119

65 65 80 85 110 110

115 115 130 105 110 110

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)

33

www.elmarkgroup.eu

DS1 - 125-160

Device for remote control (electrical) Description: The device switches off/on the breaker to which it is mounted, at electrical signal it allows control from a great distance Technical data: - operating voltage of the executive mechanism: 230/400V 50/60Hz - two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90C - two types of executive mechanism: * magnetic operation for breakers DS1 up to 160A * motor operation for breakers DS1 from 250 to 800A Mounting: The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 and 2), and buttons on/off are fixed at the door of the distribution box and at the remote control device

A3

Type of the breaker

Operating voltage

Type

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

DS1 - 250-1600

DS1 125 DS1 160 DS1 250 DS1 400 DS1 630 DS1 800 DS1 125 DS1 160 DS1 250 DS1 400 DS1 630 DS1 800 DS1 1600 DS1 1600

400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 400V
scheme 2

ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC

44907 44908 44909 44910 44911 44911 44912 44913 44914 44915 44916 44916 44924 44926

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

scheme 1

Table with the dimensions for remote control Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) A 1 B1 B2 H

DC DS 1 125 ADC DS 1 160 ADC DS 1 250 ADC DS 1 400 ADC DS 1 630/800

103.5 103.5 139 226 226

110 110 -

30 35 132 132 132

90 90 -

92 92 105 132 132

Terminal extension accessories Straight copper tin-plated terminals provide the bringing of the cable connection out of the terminals of the breaker and guarantee a firm connection According to the breakers capacity we offer terminal extension sets with various section Mounting: Mounted with bolts right to the terminal outlets of the breaker with the base
Type Rated current () Catalogue number Package (pcs)

P 125 TP 160 TP 250 TP 400 TP 630

125 160 250 400 630

31125 31160 31250 31400 31630

6 6 6 6 6

34

www.elmarkgroup.eu
d

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 631250A
Type of the breaker Overall dimensions (mm)

W
76 91 106 148 180 180 210 210

L
142 155 165 256 270 270 275 330(460)

H
70 61 80 95 103 103 95 137

H1
77 73 90 110 115 115 115 200

DS2-63
L

DS2-100 DS2-225 DS2-400

H H1

DS2-500 DS2-630 DS2-800 DS2-1250

A4

Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 400V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):6000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -2055
Type Rated current In (A) Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu Operating breaking capacity ()Ics Operating breaking capacity (mm2) Protection from overload Catalogue number Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 63

63

18

12

16

fixed

44006

1 / 12

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity ()Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 100

100

22

15

35

fixed

44010

1 / 12

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 631250A
Type Rated current In (A) Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu Operating breaking capacity ()Ics Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

35

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Protection from overload Catalogue number Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 225

225

35

25

70

fixed

44022

1 / 12

A4

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity ()Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 400

400

42

35

180

fixed

44004

1 / 12

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity ()Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 630 DS2 - 630

500 630

50 50

42 42

240 240

fixed fixed

44005 44036

1/2 1/2

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity ()Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 800

800

65

48

240

fixed

44008

1/1

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity ()Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 1250 DS2 - 1250

1000 1250

85 85

65 65

240 240

fixed fixed

44000 44502

1/1 1/1

36

Circuit breakers
www.elmarkgroup.eu

High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series

The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker used to control and protect low voltage electrical distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters of the circuit protection, built in under voltage release, remote control, earth protection and load monitoring. Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - motor control - mounted auxiliary devices for automation - under voltage release, earth protection, intelligent controlling block with a possibility for a choice of the protected function Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 8000V * Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail * Connecting: - copper rails - busway connection at the back * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 500 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 9000 * IP code: IP54 * Mounting: - clamping with bolts - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Basic protective functions: * Overload protection with long time delay * Short circuit protection with short time delay, time inversion limit * Short circuit protection with short time delay, time fixed limit * Instantaneous short circuit protection * Earth protection function * Full stability function * Overload alarm function * Test function * Auto diagnostics function A commutation type of breakers with RS 485 connection for duplex transmission of all function parameters, adjustment and data can also be produced at client's order and delivery terms agreement.

A5

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; IEC 947-2 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Center of the installation opening

Center of the installation opening

Side special level , wiring terminal

Starndart level

Outside dimensions
DW1 2000A DW1 3200A

Installation openings Center of the installation opening Instalation base

A H W B L L1 H1 H2 H3 W1/W2 L5 L6 L7 W3-W5

340 402 362 150 373 290 52 112 20 95 17 40 82 60 12

352 432 435 175 507 448 92 112 30 115 17 40 82 100 12

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series

Connecting scheme
Main circuit

37

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Intelligent controller Closed

Emergency breaking

Electrical breaking

Electrical closing

Auxiliary switches

Fault

SB2 SB1

J21 SB3

Accumulated energy

Break

3 5

25

27

29

31 33 35

36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 XT

A5
Q 0
3(or4) 6(or8)

M SA DF
Control power supply

0
Main loop power supply

Process unit

(+)

(-) 1 2

26

28

30

32

34

37

40

43

46

Operating power supply

AC380V/220V

DC power supply module

U1(+) U2(-) DC220V 110V

Type

Rated current In (A)

Rated voltage Un (V)

Breaking capacity ()

Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles)

Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

DW1 - 2000

2000 2500 3200

690 690 690

80 100 100

500 500 500

9500 9500 9500

44209 44255 44329

1/1 1/1 1/1

DW1 - 3200

38

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Circuit breakers Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)

The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is designed to provide continuous power supply and two electrical sources automatic switch in case of failure or deviation from the set parameters. The system for dual power change-over switch consists of two high capacity circuit breakers mounted on a metal frame connected with common operating mechanism and controlled by a command device that controls the system parameters' correspondence. Functions: * Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits at main power supply discrepancy * Switching to dual power change-over at power supply phase lack * Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers * Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations supplied with a generator or a second power supply source (hospitals, post offices, military sites, control rooms) * Remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics * Control: motor * Controls the following circuit parameters: - presence of the three phases - the phase voltage to be in the set limits - overload - short circuit at the outlet Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Surge voltage wear resistance: 8000V * Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail * Connecting: - copper rails - flexible or rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): 20000 * IP code: IP21 * Mounting: - clamping with bolts - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Basic functions of the control device: * Overload protection * Instantaneous short circuit protection * Under phase protection * Possibility for setting the change-over time between the two sources min 3s * Possibility for automatic switch-over to the main power supply source after restoring its parameters The system for dual power change-over switch is offered in two types: - with display (control device) mounted on the mounting plate (integrated type) - with separated control display

A6

Dimensions for ABP Eq1

Dimensions (mm) Type of the breaker D H

main power supply

alternative power supply

inner type EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630 moved type EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630

480 480 620 660

240 240 300 300

450 450 590 630

210 210 270 270

140 140 235 240

420 420 570 610

230 230 300 300

390 390 540 580

200 200 270 270

145 145 235 240

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity () Ics

Section of the Electrical power supply wear resistance 2) (number of cycles) conductor (mm

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630 EQ1 - 100* EQ1 - 225* EQ1 - 400* EQ1 - 630*

100 225 400 630 100 225 400 630

22 35 42 50 22 35 42 50

15 25 35 42 15 25 35 42

35 70 180 240 35 70 180 240

6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000

44100 44225 44403 44633 44101 44226 44404 44634

1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1

Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display

Indirect protection devices Residual current devices JVL 1

www.elmarkgroup.eu
COVER TERMINALS NON-FLAMABLE BASE CONTACT TEST BUTTON SECONDARY WINDING OF TT PRIMARY WINDING SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER (TT) WITH TOROID ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAY BREAKING (RELEASE) UNIT

39

B1

40

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 61008-1 EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1

Indirect protection devices Residual current devices JVL1 series (RCD)

The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic The breakers are in accordance fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the with the directives of EC Low conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 neutralized. This residual field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. The device breaks EEC and Electromagnetic when the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker. Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. Functions: 89/336 EEC. - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure Technical data: B1 * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz * Rated current: according to the table * Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s at 2I n * Surge voltage wear resistance: 2000V * Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000A * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A * Type of the plastic: - material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66 - permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):5000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position * Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Connecting: - power supply busbar (only for bipolar) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid with separate protective conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors). The corpus of the consumer depending on the grid type must be connected either to the protective conductor or be earthed.

Fig.1

Indirect protection devices Residual current devices JVL1 series (RCD)

Dimensions
36 74.5

41

www.elmarkgroup.eu

72

N N

T
TEST

T
65 85
TEST

OFF

35.5

OFF

85

B1

Number of poles

Rated current In (A)

Catalogue number Leakage current I D n(mA)

Package / Box ( pcs)

30 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0 80.0 40210 40216 40292 40221 40231 40241 40261 40281

100 40212 40217 40293 40222 40232 40242 40262 40282

300 40213 40218 40294 40223 40233 40243 40263 40283

500 40214 40219 40295 40224 40234 40244 40264 40284 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60 1 / 60

Number of poles

Rated current In (A)

Catalogue number Leakage current I D n(mA)

30 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 63.0 80.0 40410 40416 40492 40421 40431 40441 40461 40481

100 40412 40417 40493 40422 40432 40442 40462 40482

300 40413 40418 40494 40423 40433 40443 40463 40483

500 40414 40419 40495 40424 40434 40444 40464 40484

Package / Box ( pcs)

1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30 1 / 30

Connecting scheme

consumer R S T JVL1 2P JVL1 4P consumer PE N

42

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN60 898-1; EN 61 008-1; EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Indirect protection devices Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JVL5 (RCD)
Description of the operating system: It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit or overload in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current device - at failure in the conductors insulation. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual magnetic field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. When the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker the device breaks and the residual current device switches off from the power supply grid. The device operates without any extra power supply to the electromagnetic residual current and is not influenced by voltage varying or decreasing. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at failure in the insulation after the breaker Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230V 50 Hz * Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table * Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: - of the residual current device: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s at 2I n - of the circuit breaker: <0.1s * Circuit breaker breaking curve: C * Surge voltage wear resistance:2000V * Breaking capacity: 6000A * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A * Type of the plastic: - material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66 - dielectrical strength: >18MV/m * Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):5000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid with separate operating neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).

B2

Combined electromagnetic residual current device and circuit breaker 1P 6kA

Type designation Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker Breaking capacity (kA) Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2) Rated current (A) Catalogue number Leakage current I n (30m) Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current I n (100m) I n (300m) I n (500m) Package / Box (pcs)

JVL5 JVL5 JVL5 JVL5 JVL5

2 2 2 2 2

6 6 6 6 6

1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0

10 16 25 32 40

40010 40016 40025 40032 40040

40011 40017 40021 40031 40041

40013 40018 40023 40033 40043

40015 40019 40026 40035 40045

7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140 7/ 140 7 / 140

Indirect protection devices Combined circuit breakers with residual current device
Standard EN60 898-1 EN 61 009-1 EN 61009-2 EN 60947-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
H 42.50.31 L

43

www.elmarkgroup.eu

350.50

450.31

Geometrical dimensions

B3
3P+N 115.5 95

1P+N
L(mm) H(mm)

2P 62 95

3P 88 95

44 95

Type designation C4xLE constructive series electrical protection number of poles (1; 2; 3; 4) circuit breaker capacity Cx rated current breaking curve - C

Description of the operating system: It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines part of the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current device - at failure in the conductors insulation. It compares the rate of the currents through the conductors in an electronic comparator. The residual current device operates normally at voltage feed. The voltage is needed for the comparators energizing a semi-conductor element with constantly set leakage current rate. This rate is compared with the actual rate. When the margin of the comparison is neutral, the residual current device does not operate, but at failure in the protected circuit insulation when it exceeds the set margin it operates and switches off the protection. For the normal operation of the residual current device, the power supplying circuit voltage must be over 170V and there must be no time variation. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50 Hz * Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table * Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: - of the residual current device: <0.1s at I n and <0.04s at 2I n - of the circuit breaker: <0.1s * Circuit breaker breaking curve: C * Surge voltage wear resistance:2000V * Breaking capacity: 4500A * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):500 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):2000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position Connecting: - power supply busbar (for two- or three polar) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have separate conductors for operational neutral conductor (N) and protective conductor (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).

44

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Indirect protection devices Combined circuit breakers with residual current device
Combined electronic residual current device 1P + N It compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors.
Type designation
Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Rated current (A)

Leakage current I n (30m)

Cat. number Package/Box (pcs) Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current I n (100m) I n (300m) I n (500m)

C41LE C10 C41LE C16 C41LE C25 C41LE C40 C41LE C50

2 2 2 2 2

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0

10 16 25 40 50

40110 40116 40125 40140 40163

40111 40117 40121 40141 40161

40113 40118 40123 40133 40136

40114 40119 40126 40145 40165

7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140

B3

Combined electronic residual current device 2P It compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors or between two phases.
Type designation
Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Rated current (A)

Leakage current I n (30m)

Cat. number Package/Box (pcs) Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current I n (100m) I n (300m) I n (500m)

C42LE C10 C42LE C16 C42LE C25 C42LE C40 C42LE C50

2 2 2 2 2

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0

10 16 25 40 50

40211 40215 40225 40240 40265

40207 40245 40229 40204 40260

40208 40235 40230 40246 40236

40209 40237 40238 40268 40269

5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100

Combined electronic residual current device 3P It compares the leakage current between three phases.
Type designation
Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Rated current (A)

Leakage current I n (30m)

Cat. number Package / Box (pcs) Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current I n (100m) I n (300m) I n (500m)

C43LE C10 C43LE C16 C43LE C25 C43LE C40 C43LE C50

3 3 3 3 3

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0

10 16 25 40 50

40310 40316 40325 40340 40363

40311 40317 40321 40341 40361

40313 40318 40323 40343 40336

40314 40319 40324 40344 40365

3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60

Combined electronic residual current device 3P + N It combines the leaking current between three phases and neutral conductors.
Type designation
Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Rated current (A)

Leakage current I n (30m)

Cat. number Package/Box (pcs) Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current I n (100m) I n (300m) I n (500m)

C44LE C10 C44LE C16 C44LE C25 C44LE C40 C44LE C50

4 4 4 4 4

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0

10 16 25 40 50

40411 40415 40425 40440 40465

40407 40445 40420 40404 40401

40408 40439 40428 40447 40436

40409 40438 40429 40446 40469

2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40

Indirect protection devices Surge arresters SPD type

45

www.elmarkgroup.eu
The surge arrestor consists of a semi-conductor valve element that opens at certain conditions. At normal conditions of the system, the surge arrestor has infinitely high resistance between the protected conductors and earthing circuit. At voltage increase due to atmospheric nature or system failure, the valve element opens and leads the excessive voltage to the grounded circuit. After reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrestor can endure high momentary overloading. Functions: - protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits from overload - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: automatic switching off at exit failure and recovery after eliminating the danger Technical data: * Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating voltage of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz * Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge arrester terminals at rated discharge current running: according to the tables B4 * Rated discharge current In the rated value of discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20s, which can be repeatedly led to the ground: according to the tables * Full discharge current Imax the peak value of the discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20s, which the surge arrester can bear once: according to the table * Constant operating current: up to 800A for 1P, 2P and 3P; up to 600A for 1P + N, 3P + N * Indication for damaged surge arrester * Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical - mounting in the distribution box on the front or right before the breaker according to the attached schemes * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN61 643-1 EN 61 643-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Three phase protection TN-C system consumer

Three phase protection TN-S system consumer

Monophase protection TT system consumer

Three phase protection IT system consumer

The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, named B, C or D (from high to low risk level). The company offers the following models of arresters: Model SPD Bxxxx for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning of the installation or in the main panel. Model SPD Cxxxx for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the installation or before the breaker. Model SPD Dxxxx for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers in combination with SPD Bxxxx/SPD Cxxxx

46

Indirect protection devices

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Surge arresters SPD type

three phase consumer

voltage from lightning main distribution panel

machine panel
SPD-D/5

mono phase consumer

power discharge during the time

B4
Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

SPD-D5/1p SPD-C10/1p SPD-C20/1p SPD-B40/1p

5 10 20 40

10 20 40 60

275 275 275 275

1.2 1.2 1.8 2

64101 64102 64103 64104

17 / 170 17 / 170 17 / 170 17 / 170

Type of the arrester

In (kA)

Imax (kA)

Uc (V)

Up (kV)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

SPD-D5/1pN SPD-C10/1pN SPD-C20/1pN SPD-B40/1pN

5 10 20 40

10 20 40 60

275 275 275 275

1.2 1.2 1.8 2

64201 64202 64203 64204

8 / 80 8 / 80 8 / 80 8 / 80

Type of the arrester

In (kA)

Imax (kA)

Uc (V)

Up (kV)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

SPD-D5/3p SPD-C10/3p SPD-C20/3p SPD-B40/3p

5 10 20 40

10 20 40 60

440 440 440 440

1.2 1.2 1.8 2

64301 64302 64303 64304

5 / 50 5 / 50 5 / 50 5 / 50

Type of the arrester

In (kA)

Imax (kA)

Uc (V)

Up (kV)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

SPD-D5/3pN SPD-C10/3pN SPD-C20/3pN SPD-B40/3pN

5 10 20 40

10 20 40 60

440 440 440 440

1.2 1.2 1.8 2

64401 64402 64403 64404

4 / 40 4 / 40 4 / 40 4 / 40

Contactors Low voltage contactors LT 1-K

47

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-4-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

The LT 1-K contactors are specially designed to control alternating current circuits with low power of the consumers and rated current up to 6A. Functions: - switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of control systems - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contactors Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC * Limits of the coil controlling voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal up to 4mm2 - rigid conductors * Terminal tightening moment: up to1.3N,m * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 45C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m

C1

Rated current in AC-3 440V up to

Rated capacity kW

Type number

Voltage (V) coil

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 6 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3

LT1 - K0610

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23061 23062 23063 23064 23065 23066 23067

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

48

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Contactors Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D

BASE STATIC MAGNETIC CORE COIL REVERSE SPRING MOVABLE MAGNETIC CORE MOVABLE CONTACTS

C2

LID STATIC CONTACTS AUXILIARY CONTACT SCREWS

Contactors Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D

www.elmarkgroup.eu

49

LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers operating in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making and the models over 40A also have 1NC operating contactor. Functions: - switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of control systems - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contactors - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz * Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for 40-95A * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-4-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

C2

Type

Type

max

Bmax

Cmax

LT-D 09~12 LT1 D18 LT1 D25 LT1 D32 LT1-D 40~65 LT1-D 80~95

34/35 34/35 40 40 40 40

50/60 50/60 48 48 100/110 100/110

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5

LT-D 09~12 LT1 D18 LT1 D25 LT1 D32 LT1-D 40~65 LT1-D 80~95

LT1-D 09~32
47 47 57 57 77 87 76 76 86 86 129 129 82 87 95

116 127

LT1-D 40~95

100

50

Contactors
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type number Rated capacity (kW) Coil capacity (VA) Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m) Section of the power supply conductor

Low voltage contactors LT 1 D

Coil voltage (V) Catalogue number Package/Box

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D0910
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO

2.2

5.5

60

1.7

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23091 23092 23093 23094 23095 23096 23097

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D0901

closed

open

C2

auxiliary contact

1NC

2.2

5.5

60

1.7

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23273 23270 23271 23272 23277 23278 23279

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D1210
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

60

12

1.7

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23121 23122 23123 23124 23125 23126 23127

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D1201
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NC

5.5

5.5

5.5

7.5

60

12

1.7

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23274 23280 23281 23282 23283 23284 23285

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D1810
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO

7.5

10

60

18

1.7

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23181 23182 23183 23184 23185 23186 23187

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D1801
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NC

7.5

10

60

18

1.7

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23275 23286 23287 23288 23289 23290 23291

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D2510
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO

5.5

11

11

11

15

7.5

90

25

2.5

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23251 23252 23253 23254 23255 23256 23257

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Contactors Low voltage contactors LT 1- D

Type number Rated capacity (kW) Coil capacity (VA) Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m) Section of the power supply conductor

51

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Coil voltage (V) Catalogue number Package/Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D2501
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NC

5.5

11

11

11

15

7.5

90

25

2.5

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23276 23292 23293 23294 23295 23296 23297

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D3210
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO

7.5

15

15

15

18.5

7.5

90

32

2.5

10

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23321 23322 23323 23324 23325 23326 23327

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

C2

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D4011
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO+1NC

11

18.5

22

22

30

20

200

40

16

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23401 23402 23403 23404 23405 23406 23407

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D5011
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO+1NC

15

22

25

25

33

20

200

50

25

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23501 23502 23503 23504 23505 23506 23507

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D6511
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO+1NC

18.5

30

37

37

37

20

200

65

25

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23651 23652 23653 23654 23655 23656 23657

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D8011
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO+1NC

22

37

45

45

45

20

200

80

50

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23801 23802 23803 23804 23805 23806 23807

1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15

Type number

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated current in AC-3 440V to up

Tightening moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V LT1 - D9511
auxiliary contact

closed

open

1NO+1NC

25

45

45

45

45

20

200

95

50

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23951 23952 23953 23954 23955 23956 23957

1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15

52

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Contactors Low voltage contactors LT 1- F

The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers operating in normal working conditions with switching on /off the consumer and dirty working environment. They are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 115A to 800A. Functions: - frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of systems for consumers control - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contactors - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 1000V; 50/60Hz * Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type * Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360 * Movable part composition: bakelite * Rated voltage of the coil: 230 and 400V AC * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors - rail * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200 * Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W * Mounting: - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 10C * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-4-1 The breakers are in accordance C3 with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Dimensions (mm): Type a b c L M Q Q1 P

LT 1 F150 LT 1 F225 LT 1 F265 LT 1 F400 LT 1 F630 LT 1 F800

Type number

163.5 168.5 201.5 213 309 309

170 197 203 206 304 304

171 181 181 219 255 255

Motor rated capacity (kW)

107 113.5 141 145 155 155

150 172 178 182 264 264

Coil capacity (VA) closed open

26 21 39 43 60 60
Rated current in AC-3 440V to up

57.5 51.5 66.5 74 89 89

Tightening moment (N.m)

40 48 48 48 80 80
Coil voltage (V)
230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400

Catalogue number
23111 23112 23113 23114 23115 23116 23117 23151 23152 23153 23154 23155 23156 23157 23861 23862 23863 23864 23865 23866 23867 23261 23262 23263 23264 23265 23266 23267 23751 23752

Package / Box ( pcs )

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V LT1 - F115 LT1 - F115 LT1 - F150 LT1 - F150 30 40 55 75 59 80 59 80 59 90 80 100 60 65

54 45

660 660

115 A 150 A

18 25

1/4 1/4

LT1 - F225 LT1 - F225

63

110

110

110

129

129

100

55

660

225 A

35

1/2

LT1 - F265 LT1 - F265 LT1 - F400 LT1 - F400 LT1 - F630 LT1 - F630 LT1 - F800 LT1 - F800

75

132

140

140

160

160

147

66

966

265 A

35

1/2

110

200

220

250

257

280

185

66

966

400 A

50

1/1

200 250

335 450

375 450

400 450

400 450

450 475

450 450

630 A 800 A

50

230 400

23771 23772

1/1 1/1

230 400

23881 23882

Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of eventual coil change.

Contactors Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D

53

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with constant current coil for control. The power plugs of the contactor are designed for control of alternating current circuits and consumers operating in normal operating class AC-3 with frequently switching on/off the consumer and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 9A to 95A. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current consumers in direct current controlling schemes at controlling signal to the coil - making of systems for consumers control - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contacts - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: from 12V DC to 220V DC * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V DC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors a C * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 600 for 40-95A * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or A - with bolts to the surface LP1-D 09~32 - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable C (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10 C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

C4

Dimensions: Type A max (mm) B max (mm) C (mm)

LP1-D 40~95
a (mm)

a
b (mm.)

LP 1 D0910 LP 1 D1210 LP 1 D1810 LP 1 D2510 LP 1 D3210 LP 1 D4011 LP 1 D5011 LP 1 D6511 LP 1 D9511

Type Rated current ()

47 47 47 57 57 77 77 77 87
Auxiliary contact (pcs.)

76 76 76 86 86 129 129 129 129

95 95 95 101 101 176 176 176 182

34/35 34/35 34/35 40 40 40 40 40 40

50/60 50/60 50 50 50 100 100 100 100

230V

Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) 400V 415V 440V 690V

12

Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V DC) 24 36 48 110

230

LP 1 D0910 LP 1 D1210 LP 1 D1810 LP 1 D2510 LP 1 D3210 LP 1 D4011 LP 1 D5011 LP 1 D6511 LP 1 D9511 LP 1 F115 LP 1 F150 LP 1 F225

9 12 18 25 32 40 50 65 95 115 150 225

1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO 1NO 1NO

2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 30 40 63

4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 45 55 75 110

4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 45 59 80 110

4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 45 59 80 110

5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 30 33 37 45 80 100 129

23962 23963 23964 23925 23966 23967 23968 23969 23970 23911 23912 23913

23098 23128 23188 23258 23328 23408 23508 23658 23958 23118 23158 23228

23130 23131 23132 23133 23134 23135 23136 23137 23138 23914 23915 23916

23971 23972 23973 23974 23975 23976 23977 23978 23979 23917 23918 23919

23980 23981 23982 23983 23984 23985 23986 23987 23988 23989 23990 23994

23139 23140 23141 23142 23143 23144 23145 23146 23147 23148 23149 23201

54

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Contactors AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43

The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed electrical devices for commutation of three phase capacitors used for power correction. They are alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx with mounted a group for peak current lowering from the transitional process of the capacitors switching on/off. This group is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched on in the beginning of the transitional process (switching on/off of the capacitor group). The contactors are suitable for capacitors with rate up to 50 kVAr. Functions: - switching on/off of capacitors for reactive power compensation - making of systems for compensation of the energy reactive component - lowering of the peak transitional currents at switching on/off of the capacitor - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contacts - secured part of the contactor against consumer contact Technical data: * Operation class: AC 6 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):300000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600 * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1

C5 The products are in accordance

with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Dimensions Type A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm)

CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-95 DPK

Type number

56 75 85 85
Rated current (A)

74 127 127 127

Rated capacity of the consumer (kVAr) 690V 400/415V

130 180 200 200

Coil voltage (V)

150 150 157 157

Catalogue number Package / Box ( pcs )

CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-115 DPK CJ19-150 DPK CJ19-170 DPK

32 32 40 40 65 65 95 95 115 150 170

8 8 12.5 12.5 25 25 30 30 35 40 50

12.5 12.5 15 15 30 30 36 36 40 50 60

230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 230 230

23932 23910 23900 23940 23961 23965 23909 23995 23991 23992 23993

1/20 1/20 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/4 1/4 1/4

Contactors Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx

55

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-1, EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

LT 4-Dxx series contactors are specially designed electromagnetic devices for commutation of three phase induction motor with reversing controlling scheme. They represent two alternating current contactors LT 4-Dxx series factory mechanically joined together. The mechanical joining also provides locking of the contactors against simultaneous switching on. The contactor is used for reverse control of induction motors with shortly joined rotor. The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A. Functions: - switching on of electrical motors in one direction of rotation and reversing of the rotation direction at outside command - making of control systems - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable switching on or separation of power contacts - secured part of the contactors against consumer contact - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor - impossibility for simultaneous switching on of the two contactors from the group due to mechanical locking Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC C6 * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative (for contactors over 40A there is also additional 1NC contact) * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors Note: The contactors are offered without fabric cabling * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1 000 000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10 000 000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600 * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Dimensions Type number A (mm) B (mm) C (mm)

LT 4 - D1810 LT 4 - D2510 LT 4 - D3210 LT 4 - D4011 LT 4 - D6511 LT 4 - D9511

Type number Rated current (A) 230V

90 90 90 165 182 182

77 85 91 91 127 127
Catalogue number 690V

83 98 105 142 142 158

Box / Carton (pcs)

Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) 400V 415V 440V

LT 4 D1810 LT 4 D2510 LT 4 D3210 LT 4 D4011 LT 4 D6511 LT 4 D9511

18 25 32 40 65 95

4 5.5 7.5 11 18.5 25

7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45

7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45

7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45

10 15 18.5 30 37 45

23301 23302 23303 23304 23305 23306

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1/ 8 1/8 1/6

56

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Contactors Auxiliary contact blocks

Auxiliary contacts At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of contacts. They are specially designed for mounting on the movable part of the magnetic core of the contactors LT 1K/D series. Functions: - extending the number of the operative contactors up to 4 in different Combinations - switches on simultaneously with the other contact system of the contactor Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * insulation voltage: 690V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Mounting: - on the movable cover of the contactor through pinching - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60 947-4-1

C7

The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Type Number of contacts Catalogue number

LT01-DN02 LT01-DN11 LT01-DN20 LT01-DN22 LT01-DN40 LT01-DN04 LT01-KN11 LA1-KN22

2NC 23002

NO+NC 23011

2NO 23020

2NO+2NC 23022

4NO 23040

4NC 23004

NO+NC 23001

2NO+2NC 23003

Catalogue 23311

Auxiliary contacts LT03-DN11 Providing on necessity additional number of plug points and are mounted sideward to the movable part of the magnetic cores of contactors of the series LT1 D. Variants with two additional plug points NO and NC are offered. Functions: - expanding the number of the operational plug points - switching on simultaneously with the rest of the contact system of the contactor Technical characteristics: * Environment operational regime: 3 * Insulation voltage: 690V * Double connector: screw connector * Connection: - flexible conductors with or without cable end - solid conductors * Mounting method: - mounting position sideward to the contactor * Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning (self-extinguishing material) Time delay contact block LT02-Dxx LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used most frequently in combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form star/delta starters for electrical motor control, as it provides the necessary time for motor winding.
Type Number of contacts Time delay Catalogue number

L02-DT0

L02-DT2

L02-DT4

N0+NC 0.1~3s 23901

N0+NC 0.1~30s 23902

N0+NC 10~180s 23903

Contactors Module contactors K series

57

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low power electrical consumers. They provide connection between the consumers in small overall dimensions, silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails. Functions: - switching on of consumers - making of control systems - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable switching on or separation of power contacts Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m

K20

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60669-2-3 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

C8

K40

27.5

Type

In

Coil voltage (V)

Contacts

Catalogue number

K20 K20 K20 K40 K40

20A 20A 20A 40A 40A

230V 230V 230V 230V 230V

2NO NO+NC 2NC 2NO+2NC 4NO

23008 23007 23009 23422 23409

2NO

NO+NC

2NC

4NO

58

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Complex compensating devices

Capacity coefficient compensation Complex compensating devices

The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably connected with its transformation. The development of semiconductor elements and the broader coming of semi-conductor transformers, frequency control, welding machines and electrical arc furnaces in industrial projects have a negative impact over the electrical power quality in the electro distributing systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to create electromagnetic field. The reactive component of current is taken from the electro distributing systems but it leads to additional losses in the power supply system and makes shorter the exploitation term of electrical devices. This leads to curving of the sinusoid form of current and voltage and interferences with harmonic character. Compensating the reactive power means to fill up the system in such a way that the needed reactive power to be created from the compensating device instead of being taken from the electro transportation system. This leads to killing the voltage fall and cable losses and increasing the outlet power of the power transporters and cutting down the bills for overconsumption of reactive energy paid by consumers to the electricity supply company. In practice compensating the reactive energy and high harmonics through LC filters combined in compensating installations has the broadest spreading. There are several types of compensation according to their location: * individual compensation when to every single motor or consumer is mounted a compensating system. It is applied to powerful motors and transformers with fixed capacity. * installation compensation when the consumers from the whole section (workshop) are grouped and compensation is accomplished for the whole section. * overall compensation accomplished at full compensation in the inlet of the installation. According to the type of the compensating devices compensation can be: * passive when the system supplies constant reactive power. In this case the system does not react to changes in the size and nature of the harmonic components and also to the per cent increase of the reactive energy in time. * active broader spread. The system controls the form of the consumed current and generates different capacity depending on the load changes. When designing the electro distributing system of industrial projects the following tasks are taken into consideration: * defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers and the voltage harmonic components * defining the additional loading of the capacitor batteries from the harmonic components and calculating the filtering elements if needed The calculation of the compensating device capacity is done by reading the reactive energy of the system and the working time of the system. Compensating devices represent a device of one or several metal boxes with common rail system, automatic regulator for cos control RPSF-xx series, different number of capacitor batteries (according to the capacity of the device) with different capacity HY 111 series, contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43 series, protective elements, etc. The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired the compensation of harmonics and reactive energy with capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY 111 series are voltage remeasured and are able to endure overload from harmonic components up to 7% from the basic harmonics. They are used in systems with high harmonics foul up to 25%. The high harmonics composition is defined after measuring the influence rate of each separate harmonics compared to the first one. In Bulgaria mostly spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics. The capacitors are remeasured for voltage 415V and are normally mounted right in the compensation systems. When the high harmonics are over 25% the system is taken to be foul and in this case except using capacitors, filters for leveling the harmonics are to be used as well. These filters are calculated on the basis of the corresponding voltage harmonics and differ for the different harmonics. They are calculated using complex mathematical programme which reads the foul rate, the significance per cent of the voltage harmonic component, etc.

D1

Capacity coefficient compensation Capacitor batteries and cos regulator

Capacitor batteries for reactive energy compensation

59

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially designed three phase dry capacitors for compensation of reactive energy and correction of the capacity factor. It represents an aluminum cylindrical body in which a metal polypropylene folio is mounted which does not require special impregnation. The permittivity characteristics are acquired through filling with a special mixture on a vegetable base (resins). The capacitor battery is constructed in such a way that at failure (overload from voltage, current or temperature) breaks the connection to the upper cover where are the connections to the power supply. This is done by a specially constructed valve for overpressure mounted right above the capacitor element. The breaking of the inner couplings provides protection to the staff and environment from damage due to capacitor element failure. There is a three phase capacitor in the cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying the capacitors. The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and active compensation. Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60831-1 EN 60831-2 Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 415V; 50Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute * Capacity: from 8 to 30 kVAr at 415V * Tolerance: 5% * Operating temperature: -40 - +55C * Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr * Built in discharging resistance * Admissible current overload: twice as much the peak current * Discharge time: <50V per minute * Altitude: 2000m Mounting: * With bolt M12 to a flat horizontal base

D2

Type of the battery

Operating voltage (V)

Battery capacity (kVAr)

Catalogue number

Type of the battery

Operating voltage (V)

Battery capacity (kVAr)

Catalogue number

HY 111A8 HY 111A12 HY 111A15 HY 111A20 HY 111A30

440 440 440 440 440

8 12.5 15 20 30

49008 49012 49015 49020 49030

HY 111B12* HY 111B25*

690 690

12.5 25

49031 49032

Note: *Suitable for wind generators

Controller for automatic regulation of the capacity factor (cos regulator) The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCF-xx series are devices for monitoring of low voltage systems and control of switching on of capacitor batteries for the capacity factor compensation. There is possibility for adjustment of the system parameters and control. Manufactured by the latest CMOS technology, they are distinguished with high degree of data security, easy programming and secure control of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and setting the parameters of the power supply system as: capacity coefficient, display of the system parameters such as voltage, current and capacity, losses, protection against overload, overload indication or lack of voltage, etc. The change of parameters is performed through a combination of buttons on the front panel. There is light diode to indicate which parameter is being displayed on the screen and which outlets are in operation. The display is four digital. There is possibility for choice of the working conditions: manual or automatic. Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V * Operating frequency: 45 65Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute * Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr * Measurement accurateness: - voltage: 1.0% - current: 1.0% - capacity coefficient: 1.0% - reactive energy: 2.0% * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Humidity: 30 60% * Display: 4 digital * Responsiveness: 20mA * Outlet: 7A * Number of outlets: 12 and 16 * Altitude: up to 2500m Mounting: * n the front panel of the box through cutting an opening

Type

HY-RPCF12 HY-RPCF16

Number of steps Catalogue number

12

16

49120

49160

Capacity coefficient compensation

60

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Filters for harmonics

Filters for harmonics and metal boxes

In the cases when the standard given in EN 50160 is not kept it is necessary to use a filtering system made of a capacitor battery and connected to it inductivity in series. The parameters of the filtering element are defined according to the rate of the given harmonics and are different for each one. The theoretical parameters of the filtering inductivity for the given capacitor batteries for voltage 415V are presented in table 1.
Table 1
Harmonics inductivity (H) Battery 8kVAr Battery 12kVAr Battery 15 kVAr Battery 20kVAr Battery 25kVAr Battery 30kVAr

L5 L7 L9 L11 L13

2.741x10-3 1.398x10-3 8.42x10 5.663x10 4.055x10

-4 -4

1.754x10-3 8.95x10-4 5.414x10 3.625x10 2.595x10

-4 -4 -4

1.462x10-3 7.459x10-4 4.512x10

-4 -4 -4

1.096x10-3 5.594x10-4 3.384x10

-4 -4 -4

8.771x10-4 4.475x10-4 2.707x10 1.812x10 1.298x10

-4 -4 -4

7.309x10-4 3.729x10-4 2.256x10-4 1.51x10-4 1.081x10-4

3.02x10

2.265x10

-4

2.163x10

1.622x10

D3

Note: At order we define the practical parameters of the filtering elements for each capacitor system in order to improve the capacity factor and minimize the consumed active and reactive energy in harmonics one.

On the basis of its production experience ELMARK offers filters for harmonics of seventh harmonic, which are presented in table 2
Inductivity for seven harmonic (H) Catalogue number Battery 8kVAr Battery 12kVAr Battery 15 kVAr Battery 20kVAr Battery 25kVAr Battery 30kVAr

49708

49712

49715

49720

49725

49730

Metal boards for making of systems for capacity factor correction Metal boards for capacitor batteries mounting made of specially processed sheet iron with protective surface. A fan is mounted to provide temperature conditions. There is possibility a breaker to be mounted on the door. The device is protected against indirect contact to the current leading elements. It is mounted directly on the walls or floor, as at mounting on a wall it is fixed with screws to the surface. It necessary to provide enough distance for cooling of the board. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 400V; 50Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kVm * Operating temperature: -5-+55C * Maximum overloading current: 1.3xIn * Surface: zinc passivation * Colour: RAL 7032 * Altitude: up to 2500m Mounting: * on vertical or horizontal surfaces

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439-1 EN 60439-2

Dimensions
Type L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) Catalogue number

CXF550/356/225 CXF1140/450/450 CXF1730/600/600

550 1140 1730

356 450 600

225 450 600

49225 49450 49600

Note: The boards are supplied with a cooling fan

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Thermal relays

61

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Thermal relays The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are devices designed for protection of induction motors from overload or overheat. They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating circuit for motor control is passed through their NC contacts. The operation of these devices is based on the curving of bimetal plates mounted in the thermal relay caused by the current passing through them. When the current to the consumer gets higher due to failure, the thermal current gets higher which leads to additional curving of the bimetal plates and at getting above the limit value for the plate it pushes the breaking mechanism and breaks the operating circuit. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching off alternating current consumers at current overload - making of control systems for consumers - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: >690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer - to the contactor through the relay terminals - the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor E1 * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Indication for protection activating * Possibility for choice of the protection restoring (through the blue button) * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Mounting: - mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of the contactor as it is additionally clamped to its frame through a pin - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Note: To protect the consumer from short circuit, before the combination contactor- thermal relay, a suitably measured breaker or safety device should be mounted.

hour
2h 1h 40 mm 20 mm 10 mm

Connecting scheme
LT 2 Exx control buttons

4 mm 2 mm 1 mm 40 s 20 s 10 s

4s 2s 1s 0.8 s 0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20

x value (Ir)

Dimensions Type a (mm) b (mm) c (mm) m (mm) x (mm) y (mm) v (mm) z (mm)

LT 2 - Kxx LT 2 - E13xx LT 2 - E23xx LT 2 - E33xx

81 86 86 115

50 55 55 76

0 10.7 9 9.5

98 108 109 124

47 47 47 54

92 92 92 109

44 44 44 70

17 17 17 30

62

www.elmarkgroup.eu
For contactor LT1-K06 type Motor capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Thermal relays

Rated current (A) Protection adjustment range Catalogue number Package / Box ( pcs )

660V 690V

LT2-K0301 LT2-K0302 LT2-K0303 LT2-K0304 LT2-K0305 LT2-K0306 LT2-K0307 LT2-K0308 LT2-K0310 LT2-K0312 LT2-K0314 LT2-K0316 LT2-K0321 LT2-K0322

0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 2.2 3.7 4 5.5

0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 7.5

0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 4 7.5 11 15 15

0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 8 10 13 18 25

0.10 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1.0 1.0 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.5 2.5 - 4 4-6 5.5 - 8 7 - 10 9 - 13 12 - 18 17 - 25

13401 13402 13403 13404 13405 13406 13407 13408 13410 13411 13412 13413 13414 13415

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

For contactors from LT1-D09 to LT1-D25 type

Motor capacity (kW) 220V 230V 380V 400V 660V 690V

Rated current (A)

Protection adjustment range

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

E1

LT2-E1301 LT2-E1302 LT2-E1303 LT2-E1304 LT2-E1305 LT2-E1306 LT2-E1307 LT2-E1308 LT2-E1310 LT2-E1312 LT2-E1314 LT2-E1316 LT2-E1321 LT2-E1322 LT2-E1353

0.37 0.75 1.1 2 2.2 3.7 4 5.5 11

0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 9 11

0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5

0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 13.0 18.0 25.0 33.0

0.10 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1.0 1.0 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.5 2.5 - 4.0 4.0 - 6.0 5.5 - 8.0 7.0 - 10.0 9.0 - 13.0 12.0 - 18.0 17.0 - 25.0 23.0 - 32.0

13001 13002 13003 13004 13005 13006 13007 13008 13010 13012 13014 13016 13021 13022 13053

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

For contactor LT1-D32 type

Motor capacity (kW) 380V 400V 440V 660V 690V

Rated current (A)

Protection adjustment range

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

LT2-E2353 LT2-E2355

11 15

11 15

18.5 22

32 36

23.0 - 32.0 28.0 - 36.0

13253 13255

1 / 100 1 / 100

For contactors from LT1-D40 to LT1-D95 type

Motor capacity (kW) 380V 400V 440V 660V 690V

Rated current (A)

Protection adjustment range

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

LT2-E3355 LT2-E3357 LT2-E3359 LT2-E3363 LT2-E3365

18.5 22 30 45 55

18.5 22 30 45 55

30 30 37 55 75

40 50 65 80 93

30.0 - 40.0 37.0 - 50.0 48.0 - 65.0 63.0 - 80.0 80.0 - 93.0

13355 13357 13359 13363 13365

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2
www.elmarkgroup.eu

63

The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx series are devices designed for control and protection of induction motors from overload, overheat or short circuit. The overload motor protection is carried out by the built in the breaker thermal elements, and the short circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements allow the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal protection. The overload protection elements include automatic compensation for the ambient temperature changes. In combination with under voltage release the thermomagnetic breaker TM 2-Exx also provides protection of the motors from fall out of a phase from the power supply. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching off alternating current consumers at current overload - switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer at inlet short circuit - protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage (if there is under voltage release) - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics 1 - possibility for change/choice of the protection current (according to the operating current of the motor) - automatic compensation of the ambient temperature Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz 2 * Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 80A according to the type in table 1 * insulation voltage: 690V 4 * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer - to the contactor through the relay terminals - the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):10000000 * Indication for protection activating * Switching on of the breaker manually with button I and switching off with button O manually or automatically at failure or after activating of the protection * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Possibility for independent operation or as an element of an automation system * Mounting: - mounting to DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

E2

Dimensions

Auxiliary contact

UVR

64

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2

E2

Type number

Rated capacity of three-phase motor in AC-3 category

Magnetic segment Thermal protection current (A) adjustment range

Thermal current Ithe TM2-E

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

220V 230V TM2-E01 TM2-E02 TM2-E03 TM2-E04 TM2-E05 TM2-E06 TM2-E07 TM2-E08 TM2-E10 TM2-E14 TM2-E16 TM2-E20 TM2-E21 TM2-E22 TM2-E32 TM3-E40 TM3-E63 TM3-E80 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 22

400V 415V 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.75 1.1 2.2 3 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 30 40

440V 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 15 22 33 45

500V 0.37 0.37 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 25 40 55

690V 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 33 55 63 1.5 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 480 550 665.5

0.1 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1 1 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.5 2.5 - 4 4 - 6.3 6 - 10 9 - 14 13 - 18 17 - 23 20 - 25 24 - 32 25 - 40 40 - 63 56 - 80

0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 9 13 17 21 23 24 32 50 64 48001 48002 48003 48004 48005 48006 48007 48008 48010 48014 48016 48020 48021 48022 48032 48040 48063 48080 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2
www.elmarkgroup.eu

65

For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can be supplied with auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the technical characteristics of the breakers Voltage release (VR) for TM 2 The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic breaker when the controlling voltage falls under breaking level 0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un. Functions: - switching off the breaker at power supply voltage fall under 0.55 0.7 Un - does not allow switching on of the breaker when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un - prevents unwarranted secondary start of the breaker at falling off and restoring of the power supply voltage - protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Mounting: * At the side of the breaker through special openings

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Type

Voltage (V)

Catalogue number

2 U225 3 U385

230 400

48099 48098

E3

Watertight box for TM 2-E Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and moisture to IP 65 * Mounting: - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 - mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with bolts - the breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on rail * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
Catalogue number 8083

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60529

Catalogue number 48912

Auxiliary contact block TM2 AE11 It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted. * Mounting: - laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx - up to 5 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted 22 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable 21 (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C 13 14 * Altitude: up to 2000m

Auxiliary contact block TM2 AN11 It is designed to switch on operational circuits or signalization. It is designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted. * Mounting: - laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx - more than 5 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60C * Altitude: up to 2000m
Type Catalogue number

2 N11 3 N11

48911 48913

66

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Starters for direct start

The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of induction motors or other electrical consumers. They are a combination of contactors LT 1 Dxx series and thermal protection LT 2 Exx fabric cabled. The starters are offered on the market in metal or plastic boxes with the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture. At mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. If necessary, at clients order the fabric mounted thermal protection in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current consumers - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 230/400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * IP code: IP 44 * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

E4

1/L1
1/L1 2/L2 3/L3

13
LT2-Exx

95

O 96

KM 1 A1

L2/N

A2

14
LT2-Exx

KM 1

KM 1=LT1- Dxx

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Starters for direct start
Type number Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz AC-3 category 220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V
166 2 x PE13

67

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Rated currentThermal relay Coil voltage Catalogue Package (V) (A) number / Box adjustment range

140 88 142 161

PE13

120 2 x PE13 2x 5.5 150 135 185 2 x PE16 16 2 x PE13 5.5 101 165 150 312 2 x PE29 4x 7.7 105 181 195

LT5 D093 LT5 D123 LT5 D185

2.2 3 4

4 5.5 7.5

4 5.5 9

9 12 18

7 .. 10A 9 .. 13A 12 .. 18A

230 400 230 400 230 400

43091 43092 43121 43122 43181 43182

1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16

Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced

Type number

Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz AC-3 category 220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V

Rated currentThermal relay Coil voltage Catalogue Package (V) (A) number / Box adjustment range

E4

LT5 D255 LT5 D325

5.5 7.5

11 15

11 15

25 32

17 .. 25A 23 .. 32A

230 400 230 400

43251 43252 43321 43322

1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16

Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced

Type number

Rated currentThermal relay Coil voltage Catalogue Package (A) (V) number / Box adjustment range 220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz AC-3 category

LT5 D405 LT5 D655 LT5 D955

11 18.5 25

18.5 30 45

22 37 45

40 65 95

30 .. 40A 48 .. 65A 80 .. 93A

230 400 230 400 230 400

43401 43402 43651 43652 43951 43952

43401 43402 43651 43652 43951 43952

Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced

68

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Star/delta starter

The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of induction motors coiled and operating according to a starter scheme star/delta. They are a combination of three contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time relay and a set of buttons start and stop fabric cabled. They provide the easy motor unwinding giving possibility for setting the time for unwinding in star as the time for switching between star and delta is fixed to 0.5 seconds. The starters are offered on the market in two types: - closed type metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors - open type for mounting in distribution boxes as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors The starters are offered on the market without mounted thermal protection which is purchased separately according to the motor capacity. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at clients order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current three phase motors operating according to a scheme star - delta - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - indication of the operating condition through a valve indicator - possibility for mounting of additional contacts (for the open type) - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93A AC * insulation voltage: >690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

E5

95 96 1 K3 2 3 4 5 K1 6 2 4 6 1 3 5 21 REMOTE 22 13 14 K2 12 14 12 14 55 56 21 22 K2 K2 67 68 K1 21 22
CONTROL

3 4 V1

5 6 W1

2 U1

K2 2 U1

V1 W1

1 2

3 4

5 6
LT2-Exx

K1

U2

V2

W2

K2

U2

V2

W2

K3
Kx = LT3-Dxx

K1

K3

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Star/delta starter

Type designation (without a box) height Overall dimensions (mm) width depth

69

www.elmarkgroup.eu

L3-D25 L3-D32 L3-D40 L3-D65 L3-D95

135 135 150 150 150

170 170 285 285 310

160 160 190 190 190

Type designation (without a box)

Rated capacity kW

Rated current

Coil voltage (V AC)

Catalogue number

220V 230V L3-D25 L3-D32 L3-D40 L3-D65 L3-D95 11 15 18.5 30 37

380V 400V 15 18.5 22 55 75

415V 15 18.5 22 55 75

440V 15 18.5 22 55 75 25 32 40 65 95 400 400 400 400 400 43253 43323 43403 43653 43953

E5

Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor

Type designation (with a box) height

Overall dimensions (mm) width depth

LT 3 -B-D25A LT 3 -B-D32A LT 3 -B-D40A LT 3 -B-D65A LT 3 -B-D95A

370 370 470 470 470

240 240 265 265 265

160 160 160 160 160

Type designation (with a box)

Rated capacity kW

Rated current

Coil voltage (V AC)

Catalogue number

220V 230V LT 3 - B - D25A LT 3 - B - D32A LT 3 - B - D40A LT 3 - B - D65A LT 3 - B - D95A 11 15 18.5 30 37

380V 400V 15 18.5 22 55 75

415V 15 18.5 22 55 75

440V 15 18.5 22 55 75 25 32 40 65 95 400 400 400 400 400 43254 43255 43256 43257 43258

Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor

70

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Reverse starters

The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and protection of induction motors with short connected rotor. They are a combination of two contactors LT1 Dxx series supplied with two buttons start and one stop fabric cabled. They provide the unwinding of the motor in one of the directions with possibility for pushing the button stop and giving command from the other start for changing the motor winding direction. The two contactors are mechanically blocked and do not allow simultaneous start in both winding directions. The starters are offered closed type in metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP54) as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. The starters are offered with mounted thermal protection which can be substituted according to the motor power. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motors operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. Functions: - switching on alternating current three phase motors in one winding direction, switching off and change of the winding direction at giving a signal - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * IP code: IP 44 * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Altitude: up to 2000m

E6

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Reverse starters

Type designation (with a box) Rated capacity kW Rated current

71

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Coil voltage (V AC) Catalogue number

220V 230V LT 4 - B - D25A LT 4 - B - D32A LT 4 - B - D40A LT 4 - B - D65A LT 4 - B - D95A 11 15 18.5 30 37

380V 400V 15 18.5 22 55 75

415V 15 18.5 22 55 75

440V 15 18.5 22 55 75 25 32 40 65 95 400 400 400 400 400 43001 43002 43003 43004 43005

Type designation (with a box)

Overall dimensions (mm) height width depth

LT 4 -B-D25A LT 4 -B-D32A LT 4 -B-D40A LT 4 -B-D65A LT 4 -B-D95A

370 370 470 470 470

240 240 265 265 265

160 160 160 160 160

E6

scheme Reverse

L1 K 2-1
4A 95NC R 96 97NO F1 98

L2

L3

I
14 N0 K1 13 S1

0
14 N0 K2 13 S2

II
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3

K1
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2

K2
6 T3

1 L1

3 L2

5 L3

F1
A2 K1 A1 A1 A2 K2 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3

K 2-5

U1 V1 W1

72

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELM 1000 frequency inverters for conveyor systems control

Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and packaging machines. The ELM 1000 inverter provides optimized V/f control and output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel buttons. Functions: - rotation speed increase automatic and manual - sliding compensation: from 0 to 20% - adjustment of the V/F control curve linear or quadratic - energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve - omission of resonance frequencies - JOG function - 'counter' function - automatic restart option in case of power supply failure - seven speed degrees control option - control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal - frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage - incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc. - outgoing discrete control signal 24V - outgoing analogue control signal 0 10V - DC brake in static mode - dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor used in inert electric motor load - output voltage adjustment option - activation of output safety functions option Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V ; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: 10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Output frequency: 0 400 Hz * Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max * Overload capacity: - constant: up to 110% - moment: up to 150% * Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1% * Type of connection: - the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB or MCCB type - connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power - connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2 Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and the motor, except as described in the product passport. *Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts - mounting position vertical gradient maximum 5 Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to install them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10 to 60 C * Altitude : up to 2000 m * Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

E7

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors ELM 1000 frequency inverters
Type of sign 1000- G -0150 T3 lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase motor power inverter type: G=constant momentum inverter model
Dimensions (mm): Type of inverter

73

www.elmarkgroup.eu

EL1000-G0007S2B EL1000-G0015S2B EL1000-G0007T3B EL1000-G0015T3B EL1000-G0022T3B EL1000-G0037T3B EL1000-G0040T3B EL1000-G0055T3B EL1000-G0075T3B EL1000-G0110T3C EL1000-G0150T3C

150 170 170 170 170 250 250 300 300 340 380

105 125 125 125 125 162 162 200 200 225 230

139 160 160 160 160 233 233 282 282 322 362

94 114 114 114 114 145 145 182 182 160 186

120 140 140 140 140 150 150 160 160 220 225

4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6

E7

Type

Input voltage

Maximum output power (kW)

Maximum current output ()

Catalogue number

EL1000-G0007S2B EL1000-G0015S2B EL1000-G0007T3B EL1000-G0015T3B EL1000-G0022T3B EL1000-G0037T3B EL1000-G0040T3B EL1000-G0055T3B EL1000-G0075T3B EL1000-G0110T3C EL1000-G0150T3C

230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V

0.75 1.5 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15

4.5 7 2 4 6.5 8 9 12 17 23 32

423107M 423115M 423307M 423315M 423322M 423337M 423340M 423355M 423375M 423391M 423392M

R S T

R S T
OP 1 OP 2 OP 3 OP 4 OP 5 OP 6 OP 7 OP 8 COM V1 V2

U V W E

TA TB TC FM V3 IM V3 12V OUT A+ BM

J 485 Comunication

I2 V3

74

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Frequency inverters EL ZVF9 type for water pumps and fans control
The frequency inverters are designed to control mono phase and three-phase induction motors with short connected rotor. Different control laws can be applied through them which make them an irreplaceable part of control systems for conveyers, packing machines, air-conditioning systems, pumps and compressors. It is not advisable to use inverters EL ZVF9 type for control of elevators. Functions: 1. Control functions - moment increase automatically and manually - sliding compensation: from 0 to 20% - control curve V/F adjustment linear or quadratic - energy saving through automatic optimizing of the V/F curve - possibility for applying PID control law - omission of frequencies that can lead to resonance - JOG function - counter function - possibility for automatic restart at momentary power supply failure - multistage speed control 2. Controlling functions - choice of control from control panel: outside terminal or COM-terminal - frequency control from control panel, outside potentiometer, current, voltage or terminal 485 - input signals for direst and reverse winding, multistage control, restart, etc - outlet control discreet signal 24V - outlet control analogue signal 0-10V 3. Brake functions - DC-brake - dynamic stopping with outside brake resistor used at motor inertia load 4. Protective functions - phase breaking at the inverter inlet - outlet overcurrent - outlet overload - inlet low voltage - overheat of bearings and windings (if there are sensors in the motor) Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V AC; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the rated voltage: 10% * Disbalance of the phases: <3% * Frequency variation: <5% * Outlet frequency: 0 400Hz * Outlet voltage: from 0 to Uin max * Overload capacity: - constant: up to 110% - transitory: up to 180% * Modulating system: width impulse modulation (WIM) * Regulating accuracy of the outlet frequency: 0.01% * Connecting: - the connecting of the inverter to the power supply grid must compulsory be through a breaker MCB type or MCCB - connecting of the consumer to the power terminals: with conductors suitable for the power - connecting of the controlling signals: flexible conductor up to 1.5mm Note: Mounting of contactors or other commutation devices is not recommended between the frequency inverter and the controlled motor, except for the cases described in the passport of the product * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface with bolts - mounting position: vertical gradient maximum 5 Note: At mounting more than one inverter in a panel it is recommended that they are mounted next to one another; when this is impossible suitable conditions for cooling the devices must be provided. * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C + 60 C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m * Possibility for widening of the functions through including additional devices

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60898-1 EN 60947-2 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

E7
mono phase inverter

three-phase inverter

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Frequency inverters

Type designation ZVF9 - G - 0075 T 4 power supply voltage code: 2=230V; 4=400V phase number: T =three-phase; S = mono phase motor power inverter type: P=quadratic moment; G=constant moment inverter model
Dimensions (mm) Inverter type

75

www.elmarkgroup.eu

EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4

170 170 170 170 170 170 250 250 336 336 380 380

125 125 125 125 125 125 155 155 316 316 360 360

159 159 159 159 159 159 230 230 180 180 210 210

113 113 113 113 113 113 143 143 140 140 160 160

142 142 142 142 142 142 148 148 168 168 200 200

5 5 5 5 5 5 5.5 5.5 10 10 10 10

E7

Type

Inlet voltage

Maximum outlet capacity (kW)

Maximum outlet current (A)

Catalogue number

EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4

230V 230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V

0.75 1.5 2.2 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15

4 7 10 2.5 3.7 5 7 9.5 13 18 24 30

423107 423115 423122 423307 423315 423322 423337 423340 423355 423375 423391 423392

brake resistance

throttle

three-phase power supply input electrical motor potentiometer input or analog voltage (DC 0 - 10V) analog current input (DC 4 - 20mA) relay in case of fault (AC250/2A)

common connection direct rolling/stop reverse/stop signalization in case of fault reversion after fault multi-speed 1 multi-speed 2 multi-speed 3 slipping

output 1 output 2

analog output DC 0 - 10V or 0 - 1 mA output +12V

76

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control

Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and packaging machines, pumps, air conditioning systems, etc. The ELM 2000 inverter provides the so-called no-sensor control, V/f control and impulse control while the output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel buttons. Functions: - rotation speed increase automatic and manual - sliding compensation: from 0 to 20% - no-sensor control of the motor - adjustment of the V/F control curve linear or quadratic - energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve - PID control law implementation option - omission of resonance frequencies - JOG function - 'counter' function - automatic restart option in case of power supply failure - fifteen speed degrees control option - control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal - frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage - auto-calibration in accordance with the switched motor - incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc. - outgoing discrete control signal 24V - outgoing analogue control signal 0 10V - DC brake in static mode - dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor used in inert electric motor load - output voltage adjustment option - activation of output safety functions option - electronic motor protection Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V ; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: 10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Output frequency: 0 400 Hz * Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max * Overload capacity: - constant: up to 110% - momentary: up to 150% * Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1% * Type of connection: - the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB or MCCB type - connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power - connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2 Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and the motor, except as described in the product passport. * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts - mounting position vertical gradient maximum 5 Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10 to 60 C * Altitude : up to 2000 m * Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

E7

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control
Type of sign 1000- G -0150 T3 lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase motor power inverter type: G=constant momentum inverter model
Dimensions (mm): Type of inverter

77

www.elmarkgroup.eu

EL2000-G0007S2B EL2000-G0015S2B EL2000-G0007T3B EL2000-G0015T3B EL2000-G0022T3B EL2000-G0037T3B EL2000-G0040T3B EL2000-G0055T3B EL2000-G0075T3B EL2000-G0110T3C EL2000-G0150T3C

150 170 170 170 170 250 250 300 300 340 380

105 125 125 125 125 162 162 200 200 225 230

139 160 160 160 160 233 233 282 282 322 362

94 114 114 114 114 145 145 182 182 160 186

120 140 140 140 140 150 150 160 160 220 225

4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6

E7

Type

Input voltage

Maximum output power (kW)

Maximum current output ()

Catalogue number

EL2000-G0007S2B EL2000-G0015S2B EL2000-G0007T3B EL2000-G0015T3B EL2000-G0022T3B EL2000-G0037T3B EL2000-G0040T3B EL2000-G0055T3B EL2000-G0075T3B EL2000-G0110T3C EL2000-G0150T3C

230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V

0.75 1.5 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15

4.5 7 2 4 6.5 8 9 12 17 23 32

423107B 423115B 423307B 423315B 423322B 423337B 423340B 423355B 423375B 423391B 423392B

R S T

R S T
OP 1 OP 2 OP 3 ... ... OP 13 OP 14 OP 15 COM V1 V2

U V W E

TA TB TC FM V3 IM V3 12V OUT A+ BM

J 485 Comunication

I2 V3

78

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Stopping equipment

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters

Brake resistor and brake element used when stopping time is little or load inertia moment is huge. Inverters up to 15W are offered with built in brake element but for consumers with high requirements to stopping, there are brake resisters as an outer module for additional mounting to the brake module. Functions: - increasing of the brake moment - providing a quick stop of the motor Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the rated voltage: 10% * Disbalance of the phases: <3% * Connecting: - connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme * Mounting: - to a metal surface/frame near the inverter - necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module - take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections
Connecting scheme of a brake resister

E8

Connecting scheme of the auxiliary elements

Inverter Breaker (MCCB)

Breaking module

Breaking resister

Contactor Inverter type Inlet reactor Inlet voltage Breaking module Break resistor admissible value for inverter type Catalogue number

Inlet EMC filter DC reactor Outside breaking resister Inverter

Outside breaking module Outlet EMC filter

EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4

230V 230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V

embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded

80W/200 160W/100 300W/70 80W/750 160W/400 300W/250 400W/150 400W/150 600W/100 800W/75 1000W/50 1500W40

422202 422204 422205 422206 422207 422208 422209 422210 422211 422212 422213 422214

Outlet reactor

Remote control (Extension of the control panel) It doubles the control panel and serves for control of the inverter from a distance. It represents the inverter panel fabric cabled with cables with different length 1.0; 1.5; 2.0; 5 and 10m. It is ordered as a separate position in addition to the standard equipment of the inverter.
Inverter type Cable length Type designation Catalogue number

EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4

2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m

UPM 1 UPM 1 UPM 1 UPM 1 UPM 1 UPM 1 UPM 1 UPM 1 UPG 1 UPG 1

422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPG2 422UPG2

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverter

79

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Filters for protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics (inlet) The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor is a precondition for interference from non-sine character in the power supply grid. It concerns to a great extent the use of powerful inverters. The protection of the power supply grid from the interference is accomplished through the mounting before the inverter of specially designed throttle elements that smoothen these non-sine waves generated at the operation of the inverters rectifier block. Functions: - protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 275/480V AC; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: 10% * insulation voltage - phase earth (2s): 2250V DC - phase phase (2s): 1500V DC * Connecting: - connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme * Mounting: - to a metal surface/frame near the inverter - necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module - take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections - mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid
Inverter type Inlet filter type Catalogue number

EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4

DL - 6TH1 DL - 10TH3 DL 15TH1 DL - 5EBK5/40 DL - 5EBK5/40 DL - 10EBK5/40 DL - 16EBK5/40 DL - 16EBK5/40 DL - 16EBK5/40 DL - 25EBK5/40 DL - 35EBK5/40 DL - 50EBK5/50

422001 422002 422003 422004 422005 422006 422007 422008 422009 422010 422011 422012

E8

Filters for protection from electromagnetic interference (EMC) (outlet) The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor can lead to interference in the magnetic circuits of appliances mounted near the inverter. This is a specially designed filter element that can be mounted at the outlet of the inverter to protect the other equipment from the electromagnetic interference from the motor power supply cable. This filter is recommended when using frequency inverters in systems with special functions, radio dependent systems, medical equipment, etc. Functions: - protection of the power supply grid from electromagnetic interference Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 275/480V AC; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: 10% * Insulation voltage - phase earth (2s): 1500V DC - phase phase (2s): 1500V DC * Connecting: - connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme * Mounting: - to a metal surface/frame near the inverter - necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module - take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections - mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid
Inverter type Outlet filter type Catalogue number

EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4

DL - 5EBL5/40 DL - 10EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 5EBL5/40 DL - 5EBL5/40 DL - 10EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 25EBL5/40 DL - 35EBL5/40 DL - 50EBL5/40

422013 422014 422015 422016 422017 422018 422019 422020 422021 422022 422023 422024

80

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELM 2500 soft starters

Soft starters are designed to control the start of three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. A number of motor control issues are avoided through them, and namely: prolonged start moments, auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of stardelta switching, auto-transformer switching, resistant switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b type of starters as per the standard requirements and it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode is set, a shunt contactor of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor operation as the soft starter is not designed to control motors in a set mode. Under a stop command in accordance with the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or can not be included in shutting the motor down. Functions: 1. System functions - over-voltage protection motor will switch off when power supply exceeds the preset limits - overload protection protects the motor from overloading - phase loss protection - temperature overload protection 2. Control functions - output faults - motor faults diagnostics - keyboard or outward control - delayed start option - faults memory Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V ; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: 10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Obligatory bypass contactor installation * Mounting : - mounting to a flat surface through bolts - mounting position vertical gradient maximum 5 Note: When more than one soft starter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Altitude : up to 2000 m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-4-2 EN 60947-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.

E9

Dimensions (mm) Type of soft starter E F d

F B R ST L A

EL M25015 EL M25022 EL M25037 EL M25045 EL M25055 EL M25075

250 250 250 250 250 510

153 153 153 153 153 260

162 162 162 162 162 194

219 219 219 219 219 389

140 140 140 140 140 232

6 6 6 6 6 8

QF
S3 Lt2 S2 S1

R LT1-D/Fxx

15 PE

14 RST

13 BX

12 STOP

11 10 RUN CM

HFR1000
U V W 1 Y1 2 Y2 3 Y3 4 T1 5 6 7 30A 8 9 30B 30C T2 T3

LT 2 Exx

LT 1 D/Fxx

Type of soft starter

Power of motor ( kW )

Rated current ()

Type of bypass contactor

Section of power supply conductors

Catalogue number

L1

EL M25015 EL M25022 EL M25037 EL M25045 EL M25055 EL M25075

15 22 37 45 55 75

30 45 76 90 110 150

LT 1-D 50 LT 1-D 50 LT 1-D 80 LT 1-D 95 LT 1-F 115 LT 1-F 150

10 10 16 25 25 35

42225015 42225022 42225037 42225045 42225055 42225075

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Programmable timers

Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15A

81

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat.N 50036

The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust eight ON/OFF cycles. Using the buttons you can programme a day of the week (the whole week, working days or off-days), time of starting of the cycle and time of switching off. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Operations: 8 switching ON/OFF * Time deviation: <2s (at 25C) * Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 6A - inductive load: up to 2.5 * Weight: 120g Mounting: E10 * DIN-rail 36 64

Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15B The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust six ON/OFF cycles. Using the buttons you can programme a day of the week (the whole week, working days or off-days), time of starting of the cycle and time of switching off. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. There is possibility for automatic correction of the time according to the seasonal sun variations. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Automatic adjustment of the current time (time correction winter/summer) * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Operations: 6 switching ON/OFF * Time deviation: <2s (at 25C) * Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 6A - inductive load: up to 2.5 * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail
36 64

Cat.N 50101

82

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Programmable timers

Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 20 The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust forty-eight ON/OFF cycles. Using the buttons you can programme time of starting of the cycle and time of switching off. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 15 minutes. The battery allows programme storing at lack of power supply. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Time deviation: <2s (at 25C) * Battery for programme storing and operation: up to 150 hours * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Li-Ion battery: 150h * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 16A * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Cat.N 50100

E10
Tariff switching clock (timer) TE 18 The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used for switching on tariff lighting in housing buildings and switching off after the adjusted time. Easy to adjust time intervals, mounting and conducting. Reliable to use. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Adjustment range: 0.5 to 20 min * Power consumption: <5VA * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 16A - inductive load: up to 10 A * Weight: 75g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Cat.N 35005

Cat.N 50102

Time relay star/delta TE 19 The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable materials. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time hold at star/delta starters. It gives possibility for time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the consumers need. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 600 seconds * Repetition accuracy: 5% from the whole scale * Adjustment accuracy: 5% from the whole scale * Zeroing time: <0.5s * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity: up to 5A * Indication: - at operation in star: red indication - at operation in delta: green indication * Weight: 150g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Programmable timers

83

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat.N 50113

Timer TE8A 1a The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. There is possibility for adjustment of eight programmes for a day or a week with minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10C - +55C * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity: up to 16A * Two outlet relays * Li-Ion battery: 150h * Weight: 150g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Cat.N 50114

E10 Timer TE8A 2a The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It has two operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +55C * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity: up to 16A * Li-Ion battery: 150h * Weight: 150g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Cat.N 50104

Timer TE6B The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted direct or reverse. There is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01 second to 99 hours 59 minutes, possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Possibility for choice of operating range: - from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds - from 1 second to 99.59 minutes - from 1 minute to 99.59 hours * Error: <0.01% 0.05s * Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity at active load: 3A * Weight: 300g Mounting: * on the front panel of the board

84

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Programmable timers

Timer TE48S-S The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted direct or reverse. It represents two separate operating channels, each of which can operate independently with time range adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes, possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Admissible variation of the input voltage: 85-110%U * Possibility for choice of operating range: - from 1 to 99 seconds - from 1 minute to 99 minutes * Error: <0.01% 0.05s * Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55C * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 85%RH * Commutating capacity at load: 3A * Weight: 300g Mounting: * on the front panel of the board

Cat.N 50105

E10

indication

indication

Adjusting block indication

1 Time setting

2 Time setting

Cat. 50102M

Timer 19M Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted for mounting on DIN rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are assigned by combinations of the keys. There is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds, minutes or hours depending on the necessity of the user. Power contact up to 3A. Technical characteristics: * Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours * Accuracy of setting: 5% from the whole scale * Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds * Consumed capacity: < 5VA * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 100 000 cycles * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 cycles * Operation temperature: -10 - +55 * Humidity: 45 - 85%RH * Computing option: up to 5 * Indication: - on power supply: red indication - on operational output relay: green indication * Weight: 150 gr. * Time functions: according to the programming guide Mounting method: * DIN rail

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Digital counters

85

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Universal digital counter CE2J The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting and high counting reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display with black lighting digits, providing excellent visibility at different lighting. The counter is to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point. Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1
Cat.N

50111

Technical data: * Display: LCD Power supply indicator * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz Current value * Counting range: 0 - 99999 * Counting speed: 30/3k cps Set value 1 and 2 * Zeroing: outside impulse * Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years Return button * Power consumption: <5VA System * Operating temperature: -10-+40C return button * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A * Weight: 250g Mounting: * on the front panel * opening with dimensions: 45x45 65

Protection indicator

Outlet channel indicator

Set value Setting buttons (1~6)

68

Operational button

Display button

68

E11

90

Combined digital counter/timer CE10J The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a definite combination from keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting, precision at operation as a timer and high reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point.
Cat.N

50120

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1 Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Counting range: 0 999 * Timer range: 0.01 99h99min * Counting speed: 30/500 cps * Zeroing: outside impulse * Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years * Power consumption: <3VA * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A * Weight: 120g Mounting: * on the front panel * opening with dimensions: 45x45

operating value

set value

68

functional button

68

68

86

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Digital counters

Total digital counter CE15J The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: built in battery * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC * Counting accuracy: <0.002% * Data storing battery: up to 5 years * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail Total digital counter CE15L The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for time impulse sequence counting with accumulation. It displays the operated time. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: built in battery * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC * Counting accuracy: <0.002% * Battery for data storing: up to 5 years * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Cat.N

50112 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

E11

Cat.N

50115 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Cat.N

50103 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Phase sequence indicator EK - RSTB The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, sequence and quality of the phases. The device indicates the following fault: - lack of one or several phases; - change in the sequence of the phases; - lowering of the power supplying voltage: under 10%; - increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%; - phase asymmetry of the power supplying voltage: 10% In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating in the device which breaks the controlling circuit. The time between fault indication and outlet relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very short breaks. When the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights) according to the hysteresic values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 400V; 50Hz * Possibility for operation range adjustment: 0.1 10 seconds * Possibility for working range adjustment: from 300 to 480 V * Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles * Indication: - green LED indication for a change in the condition - red LED - failure * Operating temperature: -5-+40C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Industrial Relays

87

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Industrial Relays and Bases Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for command transfer towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values enabling the direct control of industrial executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from silver-coated electrolytic copper. The entire contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic with a test-button installed to it. The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric installation and the relays and is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar. Technical Characteristics: * Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V , 50 z and from 12 to 110V DC * Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 -110% Un * Rated current of the sockets: 10 * Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles * Isolation resistance: 500 m /min (500V) * Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50z * Dielectric strength: 1000V /1 min * Turn-out time: 25ms * Working temperature: -5 - + 65 * Humidity: 35 - 85% RH Method of installation: * on a DIN rail by means of a socket
Relay type Voltage of the coil (V) Socket type Resistance of the coil () Catalogue number

Documents corresponding to the product:EN 60947-5-1; EN 61810

E12

ELM - 14FC ELM - 14FC ELM - 14FC

12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC

PSF14A PSF14A PSF14A

270 1080 4340

57141 57142 57143

Relay type

Voltage of the coil (V)

Socket type

Resistance of the coil ()

Catalogue number

ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13
Relay type

12 VAC 24 VAC 48 VAC 230 VAC 12 VAC 24 VAC 48 VAC 110 VAC 230 VAC
Voltage of the coil (V)

ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23
Socket type

20 80 320 7400 20 80 320 1700 7400

Resistance of the coil ()

57601 57602 57603 57605 57611 57612 57613 57614 57615

Catalogue number

ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04
Relay type

12 VAC 24 VAC 48 VAC 230 VAC 12 VAC 24 VAC 48 VAC 110 VAC 230 VAC

ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4

42 168 675 14000 42 168 675 3500 14000

Resistance of the coil ()

57521 57522 57523 57525 57541 57542 57543 57544 57545

Catalogue number

ELM - 14A ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.23

8 11 14 8 11

57901 57902 57903 57904 57905

88

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Devices for temperature measurement
Digital temperature regulator TK2T K; J; Pt 100 The device is used for temperature control and indication in industrial projects. It allows the following and regulation of temperature in range up to 999C depending on the mounted measuring element thermo pair or thermo resistance. It is offered in versions for the most popular types of measuring elements K (CA); J (IC) PT 100 as the last letter of the type defines the measuring element type. The device is to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is easy to program through a combination of buttons on the front panel. On the LCD display are values of the set and actually measured temperature on different lines. The device allows easy change of the set temperature and possibility for choice of switching on PID regulation law. It allows easy adjustment of the regulation, and the mounted SSR relay makes it convenient for thyristors control and provides high operation reliability. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Admissible deviation of the power supply voltage: 85 110%Un * Inlet signal: thermo pair K, J or thermo resistance PT 100 * Outlet: S:SSR * Failure outlet: relay * Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles * Indication: - green LED indication for the measured (current) temperature - red LED indication for the set temperature * Insulation resistance: 20 m min (500V) * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 2000V; 50Hz * Operating temperature: -5 - +65C * Humidity: 35 85%RH Mounting: * on the front panel

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Type Catalogue number

TK 2 T - K TK 2 T - J TK 2 T - Pt100

50121 50122 50123

E13

Thermocouple and thermo resistance The thermo-measuring elements are designed for measuring the temperature in the point of contact between the surface (warmed or cooled) and the thermo-element. They are a comparatively cheap and the most wide-spread method for temperature measurement. The thermocouples are produced by accumulating two conductors from a special measuring alloy in one common head. Each of these elements has a specific electromotive voltage at a specific temperature. The temperature measuring is based on the difference in the electromotive powers between the hot and the cool end of the thermocouple, while this difference in the form of voltage of several milivolts is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermocouple is produced and calibrated for measuring of specific temperature ranges depending on the alloys of which it is made. When thermocouples measuring great distances from the thermoregulators are used (more than 15 points), it is obligatory to use compensatory cable corresponding to the type of the thermocouple. The thermo-resistant elements action is based on the capacity of specific alloys, very often Pt100 to change their resistance when the temperature is changed. For each temperature value is specified a value of resistance. This value is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermoregulator operates with a specific type of thermo-element.

Type of thermo-element

Symbol

Temperature range

Type of catching

Sizes of the head

Size of the free end

Catalogue number

K K K K J J Pt100 Pt100

WRNT - 01 WRNT - 01 WRNT - 31 WRNT - 13 WRKT - 01 WRKT - 13 WXPT - 13 WXPT - 13

-15 95C 0 400C 0 400C 0 400C 0 400C 0 400C -15 95C 0 400C

nut nut Bayonet explosion-proof nut explosion-proof explosion-proof explosion-proof

30 x 35 30 x 35 30 x 35 6 30 x 35 6 6 6

1m 1m 0.5m 2m 1m 2m 2m 2m

50K95G 50K40G 50K40B 50K40EX 50J40G 50J40EX 50PT95EX 50PT40EX

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Current measurement transformesr

89

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Current measurement transformers MSQ xx type The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems for current characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signaling, etc. They are with x/5 gear ratio as X is the inlet range of the transformer. Technical data: * Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz * Admissible deviation of the operating current: 1.2 x In * Inlet current: 50 1200A * Outlet current: 5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+65C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Precision class: 0.5 Mounting: * vertically or horizontally to the power supplying rails according to the opening of the transformer

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1; EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6

E14
MSQ -30
Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Catalogue number

50/5 75/5 100/5 150/5

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

5 5 5 5

0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

45050 45075 45103 45153

MSQ -40
Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Catalogue number

200/5 250/5 300/5 400/5 500/5 600/5

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

10 10 10 10 10 10

0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

45204 45254 45304 45404 45504 45604

MSQ -60
Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Catalogue number

400/5 500/5 600/5 800/5 1000/5 1200/5

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

15 15 15 15 15 15

0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

45406 45506 45606 45806 45906 45916

90

www.elmarkgroup.eu
JBK5 - xxx main transformer

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors 89 Voltage transformers

Functions: It reduces main voltage within standard range * separates the galvanic power supply circuit from the operation circuit Technical features: * Input voltage: 400 or 230 V * Output voltage: 230-110-48V or 110-48-24V * Frequency : 50/60Hz * Short circuit resistance: unstable * Temperature class: (130C) * Construction: open (to be installed in other products) * Magnetic circuit: cold rolled electric furnace steel * Coils: pure electric copper * Protection degree: Ip00 Connection: * flexible or hard conductors of relevant section to terminals Mounting: * Mounting in distribution boards or products * fastening: by means of screws/bolts to the surface * position: vertical * ambient temperature: -20 +40

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

E15

d F C D

Type

Initial voltage (V)

Secondary voltage (V)

Power VA

Dimensions C D E F G d Catalogue number

EVT5 - 150VA EVT5 - 150VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 250VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 - 500VA EVT5 -1000VA EVT5 - 1000VA EVT5 - 1600VA EVT5 - 1600VA

230 400 230 400 230 230 400 400 230 400 230 400

48-24-12 48-24-12 48-24-12 48-24-12 48-24-12 110-48-24 48-24-12 110-48-24 48-24-12 48-24-12 48-24-12 48-24-12

150 150 250 250 500 500 500 500 1000 1000 1600 1600

100 100 130 130 150 150 150 150 170 170 190 190

80 80 100 100 113 113 125 125 125 125 125 125

100 100 120 120 133 133 133 133 150 150 150 150

50 50 53 53 53 53 53 53 65 65 65 65

110 110 130 130 140 140 140 140 155 155 170 170

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

45241 45441 45242 45442 45245 45215 45445 45415 45241 45441 452416 454416

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Displaying measurement devices

91

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Digital voltmeter/amperemeter EKDP 15 A/V Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types: -amperemeter -voltmeter It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure constant current (AD,DV) and alternating current (AA,VA) quantities. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz * Inlet signal: - operating as voltmeter: 2 700V (the range is adjusted from inside) - operating as amperemeter: 5 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside) Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used * Consumption: <5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+50C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale * Display: LCD * Weight: 150gr Mounting: * DIN-rail

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Type Catalogue number

EKDP-15AA EKDP-15AD EKDP-15VA EKDP-15VD

50117A 50117D 50116A 50116D

inlet

E16

power supply

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Digital voltmeter/amperemeter and frequency meter EKDP7 Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the following types: - amperemeter: EKDP7 AA amperemeter for alternating current EKDP7 DA amperemeter for direct current - voltmeter: EKDP7 AV voltmeter for alternating current EKDP7 DV voltmeter for direct current EKDP7 Hz frequency meter It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure direct current and alternating current quantities. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz * Inlet signal: - operating as voltmeter: 2 700V (the range is adjusted from inside) - operating as amperemeter: 5 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside Note: For high current range a current measurement transformer should be used for alternating current device and a measurement shunt for direct current. * Consumption: <5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+50C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale * Display: LCD * Weight: 130gr Mounting: * on the front panel

Type

Catalogue number

EKDP7-AV EKDP7-AA EKDP7-DV EKDP7-DA EKDP7-HZ

50106 50107 50108 50109 50110

92

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Displaying measurement devices
Electronic electrometers for mounting on a DIN rail type DDS 722/DTS 722 Electronic monophase and three-phase electrometers designed for measuring active energy adapted for mounting on DIN rail. They perform direct measuring of electric energy, while the measured quantity of electric energy is displayed on a seven-digit LCD display. No additional calibration of the system is needed. Technical characteristics: * Direct measuring of current: up to 30 (100) ; 50/60Hz * Automatic temperature compensation * Light indication on loss of phase * Indication for reverse connection * Indication for faulty measuring * Measuring class: 1

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard IEC 61036

12.5

35

88

67

63 88

44 127 68 73

E16

75

Monophase
Type designation Measuring range

Three-phase
Precision class Voltage (V) Note Catalogue number

DDS722 - 10 DDS722 - 15 DDS722 - 30 DTS722 - 10 DTS722 - 15 DTS722 - 30

10 (40) 15 (60) 30 (100) 3x10 (40) 3x15 (60) 3x30 (100)

1 1 1 1 1 1

230 230 230 400 400 400

50210 50215 50230 50410 50415 50430

Analogue (pointer) panel meters SD72 type for build-in Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for frequency measurement, capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply grid. They are manufactured on the basis of bridge measurement schemes. There is possibility for display change for the higher scopes of measuring.
Designation panel meter Type of the measurement system Precision class Range Note Catalogue number

amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter amperemeter voltmeter * frequency meter** cos meter amperemeter DC amperemeter DC voltmeter DC voltmeter DC wattmeter wattmeter wattmeter

MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI MEMC MEMC MEMC MEMC MEMSI MEMSI MEMSI

1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

0-40 0-100 0-200 0-400 0-600 0-1000 0-1500 0-500V 45-65Hz 3P 400V 0-5A 0-50A 0-50V 0-100V 0-3000W 1P240V 0-3000W 3P 3 line 0-3000W 3P 4 line

current transfer 100/5 current transfer 200/5 current transfer 400/5 current transfer 600/5 current transfer 1000/5 current transfer 1500/5 outer resistor 60mV -

50118 654010 654020 654040 654060 654100 654150 50125 50126 50127 50128 50129 50130 50131 50132 50133 50134

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60051-1

Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; MEMC magnetic-electrical movable coil * Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding ** Possibility for voltage 110, 230, 400V

45

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Manual meters

93

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat. 5195510

Digital multimeter 5510 This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 0.4 / 4 / 40 / 400 / 600 V * AC voltage : 4 / 40 / 400 / 600V * DC current: 400 / 4000 / 40m / 400m / 10A * AC current: 400 / 4000 / 40m / 400m / 10A * Resistance: 400 / 4K / 40K / 400K / 4M / 40M * Capacitors: 4 / 40 / 400 / 4 / 40 / 100F * Frequency: 10 / 100 / 1k / 10k / 100k / 200kHz * Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9% * Temperature: -20 up to 1000 * Humidity: 30% to 95% * Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux * Noise level: 35 to 100dB * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 310 g (including battery) * Battery: 1x9V * Dimensions: 83 162 47mm

E17
Digital multimeter 420C This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V * AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V * DC current: 200 / 2000 / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A * AC current: 00 / 2000 / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M * Temperature: -20 up to 1000 * Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 200 g (including battery) * battery: 3x1.5 V * dimensions: 75 158 35mm Digital multimeter 3055 This is a digital device for measuring of all electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V * AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V * DC current: 2m / 20m / 200m / 10A * AC current: 200m / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200M * Capacity: 2000p / 20 / 200 / 20F * Temperature: 0 up to 1000 * Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V * Transistor test: Vce3V , Ib10F * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 495 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 97 200 48mm

Cat. 519420

Cat. 5193055

94

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Manual meters

Digital multimeter EM3058 This is a digital device for measuring of temperature and all electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V * AC voltage: 200 m / 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V * DC current: 20 / 200 / 2m / 200m / 10A * AC current: 20 / 200 / 2m / 200m / 2 / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200M * Capacitors: 2 / 20 / 200 / 2 / 20F * Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz * Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9% * Temperature: 0 up to 1000 * Logical level: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 495 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 97 200 47 mm

Cat. 5193058

E17
Digital multimeter 31 This is a digital device for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analoguedigital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication. Technical features: * DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V * AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V * DC current: 240 / 2400 / 24m / 240m / 10A * AC current: 240 / 2400 / 24m / 240m / 10A * Resistance: 240 / 2400 / 24K / 240K / 2400K / 24M * Capacity: 25 to 252F * Frequency: 50 / 500 / 5000 / 50k / 0.5 MHz * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 137 g (including battery) * battery: 2x1.5 V * dimensions: 70 126 28mm Digital multimeter / pen 3215 This is a digital device for measuring of electric values in the form of a pen. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity selection, range overload indication. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication and a torch. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V * AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V * DC current: 20m to 200mA * AC current: 20m to 200mA * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M * Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 182 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 57 230 30mm

Cat. 519031

Cat. 5193215

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Manual meters

95

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat. 519202

Digital clamp meter EM202 This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * AC current: 20 / 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 k * Temperature: -40 up to 1400 * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 400 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 99 250 43mm Digital clamp meter EM204 This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display, low battery indication, overload protection. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * DC current: 200 / 1000A * AC current: 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 k * Frequency: 2 kHz * Temperature: -40 up to 1400 * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 400 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 99 250 43mm Digital clamp meter EM266 This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display and retain function option, low battery indication and overload protection. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * AC current: 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 / 20 k * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 310 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 69 229 38mm

E17

Cat. 519204

Cat. 519266

Cat. 519520

Infrared temperature meter EM520A This is a digital device for measuring of temperature.The temperature is measured with no contact. It has a laser counter for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery low indication and overload protection. Technical features: * Temperature: -20 up to 320 / -4 to 608 F * Distance to point size: 6:1 * Precision: 2 C or 2% in reading * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 90 155 45mm

96

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Manual meters

Phase meter Gk7 A device indicating phase availability in the system. No contact phase indicator featuring sound and light indication of phase availability. Technical features: * Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V * Frequency range: from 50 Hz to 500 Hz * dimensions: length 62mm

Cat. 519GK7

E17
Digital detector 4 in 1 series TS530 This is a device for detecting metals, voltage and live conductors, wooden struts, or piping sections. The device has a 2meter measuring tape. It features light and sound indication. When an object is located, the display light blinks and marks with increasing position. Once the exact position is located, a light point is marked on the wall through a button. Technical features: * 2-meter measuring tape * Pen: marking the located detail * Piping section: metal pipe up to 25mm * Wooden struts: 30x30mm * Live conductors detection: 50mm for 90 ~ 250V; 50/60Hz * Weight: 213 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9 V * dimensions: 73 x 180 x 32mm

Cat. 519530

Industrial repair kit ETK06A A finely packaged repair kit containing four elements in a metal briefcase, sealed with special plastic foam and struts for each instrument. The kit includes: * Digital multimeter EM420 * Digital clamp-on ammeter EM465 * Phase meter GK7 * Infrared temperature meter EM520A

Cat 51906A

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Accessories

97

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Bell transformer Modified for power supply of bells and other signal devices with alternating voltage 8V, 12V, 24V and capacity up to 3.8A. * The voltage of the primary winding voltage is 230V * Mounting on DIN-rail

Cat. 5001

Bell Used for sound signalization in housing and industrial buildings. * Sound level: 80 dB Consumption: -3.6VA for power supply 8 -12V -5VA for power supply 230V * Mounting on DIN-rail

E18

Type

Un (V)

Catalogue number

Bell

8-12 230

5012 5220

Plug for mounting on DIN rail Plug German type type for Din rail mounting. It provides plug presence in electric boards and easy cabling. * Supply voltage: 230V * Computing option: up to 16 * Operation temperature: from -10 up to +40 * Humidity: up to 85%RH Mounting method: * DIN rail

98

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Limit switches
The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminum shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and water. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series TZ-6xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100m * Contact resistance: 15m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000 * Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V * Protection degree: IP65 * Cable input: cable gland PG11 * Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm2

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

metal cylinder

350g

115g

0.5mm

5.5mm

15-active 5A-inductive

TZ-6001

466001

F1

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

oil-resistant metal cylinder

800g

240g

2mm

5mm

15-active 5A-inductive

TZ - 6101

466101

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

oil-resistant cylinder with metal roll

500g

100g

1mm

3.5mm

15-active TZ - 6102 5A-inductive

466102

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

oil-resistant horizontal lever with metal roll

640g

230g

5mm

6mm

15-active TZ - 6104 5A-inductive

466104

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

oil-resistant vertical lever with metal roll

640g

230g

5mm

6mm

15-active 5A-inductive

TZ -6143

466143

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

spring lever

150g

20

TZ - 6106

466106

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for setting of gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They feature a vibration-resistant metal shell. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series SCA-xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endirance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V * Rated current: up to 10A * Protection degree: IP65 * Cable input: cable gland PG11 * Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm2 * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Type of the head Power of starting Power of release Switching position General movement Rated current Type Catalogue number

99

metal cylinder

800g

400g

2.0mm

5.8mm

10-active CSA - 001 4-inductive

46001

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

cylinder with metal roll

F1

800g

400g

2.0mm

5.8mm

10-active CSA - 003 4-inductive

46003

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

horizontal lever with metal roll

800g

400g

2.0mm

5.8mm

10-active CSA - 012 4-inductive

46012

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

adjustable lever with metal roll

400g

100g

22.5

95

10-active 4-inductive

CSA - 031

46031

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

lever with metal roll

400g

100g

22.5

95

10-active 4-inductive

CSA - 021

46021

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

spring lever

150g

50g

22.5

50mm

10-active 4-inductive

CSA - 081

46081

100

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Limit switches
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-resistant metal shell with plastic lid, resistant to oil and water. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series TZ-8xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 000 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V * Rated current: up to 10A * Protection degree: IP65 * Cable input: cable gland PG11 * Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm2 * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Type of the head Power of starting Power of release Switching position General movement Rated current Type Catalogue number

lever with plastic roll

750g

100g

20

50

5-active 3-inductive TZ - 8104

468104

F1

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

adjustable lever with plastic roll

750g

100g

20

50

5-active 3-inductive TZ - 8108

468108

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

cylinder with metal roll

900g

150g

1.5mm

4.0mm

5-active 3-inductive TZ - 8112

468112

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

metal cylinder

900g

150g

1.5mm

4.0mm

5-active 3-inductive TZ - 8111

468111

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

metal rod

750g

100g

20

50

5-active 3-inductive

TZ -8107

468107

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release
-

Switching position

General movement
-

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

spring lever

150g

30mm

5-active 3-inductive TZ - 8167

468167

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic strength and resistance to oil, water and pressure. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch series CWL-xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100m * Contact resistance: 15m * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000 * Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V * Protection degree: IP65 * Cable input: cable gland * Metal shell * Vibration-resistant
Type of the head Power of starting Power of release Switching position General movement Rated current Type Catalogue number

101

metal cylinder

2720g

910g

2.0mm

6.4mm

10-active 3-inductive

CWLD

46LD

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

F1

cylinder with metal roll

2720g

910g

2.0mm

5.6mm

10-active 3-inductive

CWLD2

46LD2

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

lever with metal roll

1360g

227g

20

50

10-active 3-inductive CWLCA2-2

46LCA2-2

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

adjustable lever with metal roll

2720g

910g

20

50

10-active 3-inductive CWLCA12-2-Q 46LCA12-2-Q

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

fork oil-resistant spring lever

1200g 150g

55 28mm

9010

10-active CWLCA32-41 46LCA32-41 3-inductive 10-active 46LNJ 3-inductive CWLNJ

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

metal rod

142g

28g

20

50

10-active 3-inductive

CWLCL

46LCL

102

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Proximity sensor
Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of metal elements motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact control sensors for level of liquids, control sensors for the speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. All-purpose proximity switch series LM xx * Insulating resistance: 50 M * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25 to +70 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 67 Object
Type
EL-LM8-3002NA EL-LM8-3002NB EL-LM8-3002PA EL-LM8-3002PB EL-LM8-2002A

LC circuit
Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC NO

Switch
Output load
130 mA 130 mA 130 mA 130 mA 150 mA

Terminal repeater
Min. size of object
8x8x1 8x8x1 8x8x1 8x8x1 8x8x1

Start distance
2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transiion t
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Catalogue number
46LM 8-32NA 46LM 8-32NB 46LM 8-32PA 46LM 8-32PB 46LM 8-22A

EL-LM8

Type

Start distance
4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transiion t
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC NO

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Min. size of object

15 x 15 x 1 15 x 15 x 1 15 x 15 x 1 15 x 15 x 1 15 x 15 x 1

Catalogue number
46LM 12-34NA 46LM 12-34NB 46LM 12-34PA 46LM 12-34PB 46LM 12-24A

F2

EL-LM12-3004NA EL-LM12-3004NB EL-LM12-3004PA EL-LM12-3004PB EL-LM12-2004A

Type
EL-LM18-3008NA EL-LM18-3008NB EL-LM18-3008PA EL-LM18-3008PB EL-LM18-2008A

Start distance
8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transiion t
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC NO

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Min. size of object

18 x 18 x 1 18 x 18 x 1 18 x 18 x 1 18 x 18 x 1 18 x 18 x 1

Catalogue number
46LM 18-38NA 46LM 18-38NB 46LM 18-38PA 46LM 18-38PB 46LM 18-28A

EL-LM12

Type
EL-LM22-3010NA EL-LM22-3010NB EL-LM22-3010PA EL-LM22-3010PB EL-LM22-2010A

Start distance
10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transiion t
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC NO

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Min. size of object

22 x 22 x 1 22 x 22 x 1 22 x 22 x 1 22 x 22 x 1 22 x 22 x 1

Catalogue number
46LM 22-30NA 46LM 22-30NB 46LM 22-30PA 46LM 22-30PB 46LM 22-20A

EL-LM18

Type
EL-LM12-4002A EL-LM12-4002B EL-LM12-4004A EL-LM12-4004B

Start distance
2 mm 2 mm 4 mm 4 mm

Power suppl y voltage

230 V 230 V 230 V 230 V

Type of transiion t
inductive inductive inductive inductive

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC

Output load
100 mA 100 mA 300 mA 300 mA

Min. size of object

15 x 15 x 1 15 x 15 x 1 15 x 15 x 1 15 x 15 x 1

Catalogue number
46LM 12-44A 46LM 12-44B 46LM 12-44A 46LM 12-44B

Type
EL-LM18-4002A EL-LM18-4002B EL-LM18-4004A EL-LM18-4004B

Start distance
5 mm 5 mm 8 mm 8 mm

Power suppl y voltage

230 V 230 V 230 V 230 V

Type of transiion t
inductive inductive inductive inductive

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC

Output load
100 mA 100 mA 300 mA 300 mA

Min. size of object

18 x 18 x 1 18 x 18 x 1 18 x 18 x 1 18 x 18 x 1

Catalogue number
46LM 18-44A 46LM 18-44B 46LM 18-44A 46LM 18-44B

EL-LM22

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Capacitive sensors

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist of two coaxial electrodes, a condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal objects, as the gearing distance for non-metal objects depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing distance adjustment for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. Capacitive sensors series CM xx * Insulating resistance: 50 M * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 15 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25 to +70 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 54

103

EL-CM12

General scheme of a capacitive transducer

Object Start distance

0~4 mm 0~4 mm 0~4 mm 0~4 mm

Inductive surface

RC generator Type of transiion t

NPN NPN PNP PNP

Switch

Output amplifier stage Note Catalogue number

46CM 12-32NA 46CM 12-32NB 46CM 12-32PA 46CM 12-32PB

Type
EL-CM18 EL-CM12-3004NA EL-CM12-3004NB EL-CM12-3004PA EL-CM12-3004PB

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

F3

Type
EL-CM18-3008NA EL-CM18-3008NB EL-CM18-3008PA EL-CM18-3008PB EL-CM18-2008A EL-CM24

Start distance
0~8 mm 0~8 mm 0~8 mm 0~8 mm 0~8 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transiion t
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC NO

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Note

Catalogue number
46CM 18-38NA 46CM 18-38NB 46CM 18-38PA 46CM 18-38PB 46CM 18-28A

Type
EL-CM24-3012NA EL-CM24-3012NB EL-CM24-3012PA EL-CM24-3012PB EL-CM24-2012A

Start distance
8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transiion t
NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC NO

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Note

Catalogue number
46CM 24-12NA 46CM 24-12NB 46CM 24-12PA 46CM 24-12PB 46CM 24-12A

Type
EL-SM12-3110NA EL-SM12-3110NB EL-SM18-3110PA EL-SM18-3110PB

Start distance
10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t
NPN NPN PNP PNP

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Note
Sensor of Hall Sensor of Hall Sensor of Hall Sensor of Hall

Catalogue number
46SM 12-31NA 46SM 12-31NB 46SM 18-31PA 46SM 18-31PB

EL-SM12

Type
EL-XM18-305PMII EL-XM18-305PMU EL-XM24-308PMI EL-XM24-308PMU

Start distance
5 mm 5 mm 8 mm 8 mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t

Type of cont ct a
NO NC NO NC

Output load
100 mA 100 mA 300 mA 300 mA

Note
current type voltage type current type voltage type

Catalogue number
46XM 18-35A 46XM 18-35B 46XM 24-38A 46XM 24-38B

EL-XM18

104

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Photoelectrical sensors
Photoelectrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation inside the sensor there is a photo signal emitter and receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse sensors, reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types of sensors differ in the way of returning the signal. They allow for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. Technical features: * Insulating resistance: 50 M * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25 to +70 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Ratedl voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 67
Truth beam type
Type
EL-G12-3A07NA EL-G12-3A07PA EL-G12-3B1NA EL-G12-3B1PA EL-G12-3C3NA EL-G12-3C3PA

EL-G12

Start distance
70 mm 70 mm 1m 1m 3m 3m

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t
NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Type of cont ct a
12; l=50 12; l=50 12; l=50 12; l=50 12; l=50 12; l=50

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Type of sensor
Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

Catalogue number
46G12A071 46G12A072 46G123B11 46G123B12 46G123C11 46G123C12

Emitter

Receiver

EL-G18

Object

Type

Reflector type

Start distance
100 mm 100 mm 2m 2m 5m 5m

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t
NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Type of cont ct a
18; l=70 18; l=70 18; l=70 18; l=70 18; l=70 18; l=70

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Type of sensor
Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

Catalogue number
46G18A101 46G18A102 46G183B11 46G183B12 46G185C11 46G185C12

F4
Emitterreceiver

Reflector

EL-G18-3A10NA EL-G18-3A10PA EL-G18-3B2NA EL-G18-3B2PA EL-G18-3C5NA EL-G18-3C5PA

Object

EL-G30

Diffuse type

Type
EL-G30-3A70NA EL-G30-3A70PA EL-G30-3B3NA EL-G30-3B3PA EL-G30-3C101NA EL-G30-3C101PA

Start distance
500 mm 500 mm 3m 3m 10 m 10 m

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t
NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Type of cont ct a
22; l=70 22; l=70 22; l=70 22; l=70 22; l=70 22; l=70

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Type of sensor
Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

Catalogue number
46G30A101 46G30A102 46G303B11 46G303B12 46G305C11 46G305C12

Emitter

Object

Type

Start distance
500 mm 500 mm 3m 3m 5m 5m

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t
NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Type of cont ct a
NO NO NO NO NO NO

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Type of sensor
Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

Catalogue number
46G35A101 46G35A102 46G353B11 46G353B12 46G355C11 46G355C12

EL-G35

EL-G35-3A50NA EL-G35-3A50PA EL-G35-3B3NA EL-G35-3B3PA EL-G35-3C5NA EL-G35-3C5PA

Type
EL-G50-3A30NA EL-G50-3A30PA EL-G50-3B4NA EL-G50-3B4PA EL-G50-3C5NA EL-G50-3C5PA

Start distance
500 mm 500 mm 4m 4m 5m 5m

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t
NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Type of cont ct a
NO NO NO NO NO NO

Output load
200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

Type of sensor
Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

Catalogue number
46G50A101 46G50A102 46G503B11 46G503B12 46G505C11 46G505C12

EL-G50

Type
EL-BZJ-211 EL-BZJ-311 EL-BZJ-411

Start distance
10 mm 9mm 9mm

Power suppl y voltage

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transiion t
Reflector Reflector Reflector

Type of cont ct a
NO NO NO

Output load
<200 mA <200 mA <200 mA

Type of sensor
Colour detector Colour detector Colour detector

Catalogue number
46BZJ211 46BZJ311 46BZJ411

EL-BZJ

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Rotary switches

Rotary switches LW26 series The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with commutated current from 20 to 160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric switching on which is realized through turning of the handle to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems. There are special rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are used to control motors, electric welding machines and other consumers. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3-1 Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz * Insulation voltage: 690V * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V * Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +50C * Humidity: 35 85% RH * Commuting capacity: up to 160A according to the tables * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * : - IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in a panel - IP65 for the breakers offered in a box * Cable connection: screw joining * Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N * Maximum section of the power supply conductors: according to the dimensions table * Weight: according to the number of the contacts Mounting: * directly to the control panel * thickness of the surface to which it is mounted: max 5mm

105

www.elmarkgroup.eu

F5

Dimensions Designation Front panel Joining conductor (mm2) Overall dimensions (mm) A B C L Mounting dimensions (mm) a b d1 d2

LW26-20

M1 panel M1 panel with inscription field

1x2.5

48 48

48 60 48 64 64 88 88

43 43 45.2 58 66 84 88

22 + 9.6n 22 + 9.6n 23+12.8n 29.2 + 12.8n 29.2 + 21.5n 35 + 26.5n 35 + 32.5n

36 36 36 48 48 68 68

36 36 36 48 48 68 68

8.5 4.5 8.5 4.5 8.5 4.5 10 10 13 13 4.5 4.5 6 6

LW26-25 LW26-32 LW26-63 LW26-125 LW26-160

M1 panel M2 panel M2 panel M3 panel M3 panel

1x4.0 1x6.0 1x16 1x35 1x50

48 64 64 88 88

106

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Scheme In (A) Levels Type number

Rotary switches
Catalogue number

Q10 three-poles switching on; motor starting and stopping; voltage turning on/off to the consumers

20 25 32 63 125 160

2 2 2 2 2 2

LW26 - 20Q LW26 - 25Q LW26 - 32Q LW26 - 63Q LW26 - 125Q LW26 - 160Q

492201 492251 492321 492631 492951 492961

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

Q11 three-poles switching over; motor starting and stopping; voltage turning on/off to the consumers; possibility for access control

20 25 32 63

2 2 2 2

LW26GS - 20/04 LW26GS - 25/04 LW26GS - 32/04 LW26GS - 63/04

492207 492257 492327 492637

F5

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

N11 3-position 2 start positions and 1 stop; for motor reversing

20 25 32 63 125 160

3 3 3 3 3 3

LW26 - 20N LW26 - 25N LW26 - 32N LW26 - 63N LW26 - 125N LW26 - 160N

492202 492252 492322 492632 492952 492962

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

S19 3-position 2 start positions and 1 stop; for two speed motor control; switching over between charging*

25 63 125 160

4 4 4 4

LW26 - 25S LW26 - 63S LW26 - 125S LW26 - 160S

492253 492633 492953 492963

Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Rotary switches

Scheme In (A) Levels

107

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type number Catalogue number

S21 3-position switching on star/delta

25 63

4 4

LW26 - 25 SD LW26 - 63 SD

492025 492063

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

H5881/3 85 for welding transformer windings switching over

32 63

3 3

LW26 - 32H 5881/3 LW26 - 63H 5881/3

492324 492634

F5

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

YH5/3 - 66 for voltage switching over

20

LW26 - 20 YH5/3

492205

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

LH3/3 - 58 for amperemeter switching on to current transformers

20

LW26 - 20 LH3/3

492206

Scheme

Type number

IP code IP

Catalogue number

Box for LW26-20/25 Box for LW26-32 Adaptor for DIN-rail for LW26-20/25

LW26 - 20-25-Q LW26 - 32-Q LW26 - 20-25-DIN

42 42

492037 492038 492039

108

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Scheme In (A) Levels Type number Catalogue N
6 7 0 1 2 5 4 3
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

Rotary switches
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

4.I7168/7

20

LW26 4.I7168/7

492028

4.I7168/7

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue N
7

2 3
1 3 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

4.H6518/5

25

LW26 4.H6518/5

492029

5 7 9 11

4.H6518/5

F5

13 15 17 19

Scheme

In (A)

Poles

Type number

Catalogue N

LW30-20-100A ON/OFF switch 3 poles

LW30-20 LW30-32 LW30-40 LW30-63

20 32 40 63

3 3 3 3

LW30-20 LW30-32 LW30-40 LW30-63

492030 492031 492033 492034

L1

L2

L3

T1
* Possibility for access control

T2

T3

IP55

Scheme

In (A)

Poles

Type number

Catalogue N

LW30-20-100A ON/OFF switch 3 poles

LW30-32

32

LW30-32 IP54

492032

L1

L2

L3

T1
* Possibility for access control

T2

T3

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Buttons and LED indicators
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Buttons and LED indicators These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in industrial automation systems. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 Technical data: * Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; * Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC) * Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit * Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation cycles * Power of mechanical compression: - at closing: 20N - at opening: 8N * Operating temperature: -20 - +70C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm * Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2 Mounting: * to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness: max 4mm * opening with size: 22.5mm

109

Overall dimensions Diagram for drill the openings

F6

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current () at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- BA 21 EL 2- BA 31 EL 2- BA 51 EL 2- BA 61 EL 2- BA 42

Button round with spring reverse

NO NO NO NO NC

6 6 6 6 6

black green yellow blue red

401021 401031 401051 401061 401042

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current () at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- B 31 Button round with spring reverse EL 2- B 42

NO NC

6 6

green red

401032 401043

IP=65
Provided from silicon lid

IP=65
Provided from silicon lid

110

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type Description Voltage for the indicator Rated current () at 400V Colour

Buttons and LED indicators

Catalogue number Note

EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671 EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671 EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671

Button round with spring reverse and LED indicator

24V 24V 24V 24V 110V 110V 110V 110V 230V 230V 230V 230V

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

red green yellow blue red green yellow blue red green yellow blue

401474 401374 401574 401674 401473 401373 401573 401673 401471 401371 401571 401671

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current () at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- BD 21 EL 2- BD 33

Switch with arrest Switch with arrest

1NO 2N

6 6

black black

401421 401433

two-position three-position

F6

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current () at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- B 42

Button with head mushroom type

1N

red

401642

spring reverse

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current () at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- BS 545

Button with head mushroom type

1N+1NO

red

401545

elease with spinning

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Buttons and LED indicators
Type Description Type of contacts Rated current () at 400V Colour

111

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Catalogue number Note

EL 2- BW8475

Button double

1NO+1N

401845

Green and red button + LED indicator

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current () at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- BG 21

Change-over switch with switch

1NO

401121

two-position with switch

F6

AD56-22

Un

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

LED indication

230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC

white white white amber amber amber green green green blue blue blue yellow yellow yellow red red red

AD56-22-W-230 AD56-22-W-110 AD56-22-W-24 AD56-22--110 AD56-22--24 AD56-22--230 AD56-22-G-230 AD56-22-G-110 AD56-22-G-24 AD56-22-B-230 AD56-22-B-110 AD56-22-B-24 AD56-22-Y-230 AD56-22-Y-110 AD56-22-Y-24 AD56-22-R-230 AD56-22-R-110 AD56-22-R-24

401123 401111 401124 401211 401224 401223 401323 401311 401324 401523 401511 401524 401723 401711 401724 401423 401411 401424

EL02 - B10x

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

1 2

1 NO 1 NC

green red

EL02 - B101 EL02 - B102

401001 401002

112

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu
EL1 - B134
Overall dimensions (mm)

Buttons and LED indicators

Type of the contact Colour Type number Catalogue number

switching on 0-1 68 68 50 1 NO black EL1-B134 401134

IP44

EL1 - B102

Overall dimensions (mm)

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

1 button with spring return IP44 68 68 50 1 NO

green

EL1-B102

401102

1 button with spring return IP65

68

68

50

1 NO

green

EL1-BP102

401132

IP44/65

F6

EL1 - B213

Overall dimensions (mm)

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

2 buttons with spring return IP44 2 buttons with spring return IP65 104 68 50 104 68 50

1 NC 1 NO 1 NC 1 NO

1 - red 1 - green 1 - red 1 - green

EL1-B213

401213

EL1-BP213

401233

IP44/65

EL1 - B339

Overall dimensions (mm)

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

3 buttons with spring return IP44 3 buttons with spring return IP65 134 68 50

1 NO 1 NC 1 NO 1 NO 134 68 50 1 NC 1 NO

1 - green 1 - red 1 - green 1 - green 1 - red 1 - green EL1-BP339 401349 EL1-B339 401339

IP44/65

EL1 - B174 Overall dimensions (mm) Emergency button with head mushroom L H W type 40

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

Release through turning

68

68

50

1 NC

red

EL1-B174

401174

IP44

Elements for automation, monitoring and control Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail
71 -0.43 660.37 49.50.31

113

www.elmarkgroup.eu

These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command boards and panels directly on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate current up to 10A with their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. There are also designed buttons combined with lamps.
450.31

350.5

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-5-1

Technical data: * Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; * Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC) * Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit * Rated consumed current (for indicators and buttons combined with indicators): <20mA * wear resistance (indicators): >2000h * Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 commutation cycles * Power of mechanical compression: - at closing: 20N - at opening: 8N * Operating temperature: -20 - +70C * Humidity: 35 85%RH * Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm * Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2 Mounting: * to a DIN-rail * Altitude: up to 2000m

F7

Type

Description

Rated current (A) at 400V

Colour

Type of contacts

Catalogue number

ELB - BL - DIN ELB - BL - DIN ELB - G - DIN ELB - G -DIN ELB - Y - DIN ELB - Y - DIN ELB - R - DIN ELB - R - DIN

button button button button button button button button

<10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10

black black green green yellow yellow red red

2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC

401505 401506 401507 401508 401509 401510 401512 401513

T Type

Description

Voltage (V)

Rated current (A) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

ELD - G - DIN ELD - R - DIN ELD - Y - DIN ELD - B - DIN ELD -W - DIN

lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp

230V 230V 230V 230V 230V

<20 <20 <20 <20 <20

green red yellow blue white

401500 401501 401502 401503 401504

Type

Description

Voltage (V)

Rated current (A) at 400V

Colour

Type of contacts

Catalogue number

ELBD - G - DIN ELBD -G - DIN ELBD - R - DIN ELBD - R - DIN ELBD - Y - DIN ELBD - Y - DIN

button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp

230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V

<20 <20 <20 <20 <20 <20

green green red red yellow yellow

2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC

401514 401515 401516 401517 401518 401519

114

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Devices for telpher control MBP type They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They are connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement. They are connected directly to the operating cable of the telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture IP65. Technical data: * Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Consumed power: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 +40C * Dampness: 35 85% RH * Number of contacts: according to the number of the buttons * Commuting capacity: up to 6A * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * IP code: IP65 * Weight: according to the number of the contacts Mounting: * directly to the control cable of the telpher (crane) - stop button type button type one-speed (x81) or two-speed (x91) number of buttons
Contact block and scheme Emergency For the directions Type Catalogue number Package

Devices for telpher control

F8

Number of buttons

2 2 2+1 2+1 2+1 4 4 4+1 4+1 4+1 6 6 6+1 6+1 6+1 8 8 8+1 8+1 8+1

emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button emergency button emergency button with switch emergency button

NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC

MBP-A281 MBP-A291
two-speed

46281 46291 46283 46283K 46294 46481 46491 46483 46483K 46493 46681 46691 46683 46683K 46693 46881 46891 46883 46883K 46893

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

MBP-A2813 MBP-A2813 MBP-A2913

two-speed

MBP-A481 MBP-A491
two-speed

MBP-A4813 MBP-A4813 MBP-A4913

two-speed

MBP-A681 MBP-A691
two-speed

MBP-A6813 MBP-A6813K MBP-A6913

two-speed

MBP-A881 MBP-A891
two-speed

MBP-A8813 MBP-A8813K MBP-A8913

two-speed

High power safety devices and isolating switches Bases for high power safety devices
Bases for high power safety devices Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60269-1

115

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permitivity alloy with mounted contact jaws of electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy fuse links taking out. All current leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; the terminals also end with bolts, to which the power supply conductors are connected. The bases are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five types of fuse links.

Base type

Overall dimensions (mm)

A1 SIST00 SIST 0 SIST1 SIST2 SIST3 25 25 25 25 25

A2 100 150 175 200 210

A3 120 170 200 225 250

B1 30 30 30

B2 30 30 58 60 60

C1 25 37 38 38 40

C2 60 72 84 100 105

d 7.5 7.5 10.5 10.5 10.5

G1
Base type Fuse link type Rated current () Rated voltage Un (V) Weight (gr) Catalogue number

SIST00 SISP00

N 00 NT 00

up to160 up to 160

600 600

193 215

12001 12001

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current ()

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr)

Catalogue number

SIST0 SISP0

N 0 NT 0

up to 160 up to 160

600 600

295 319

12010 12010P

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current ()

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr)

Catalogue number

SIST1 SISP1

N 1 NT 1

up to 250 up to 250

600 600

550 550

12100 12100P

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

116

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Base type Fuse link type

High power safety devices and isolating switches Fuse links for high power safety devices
Rated current () Rated voltage Un (V) Weight (gr.) Catalogue number

SIST2 SISP2

N 2 NT 2

up to 400 up to 400

600 600

770 810

12200 12200

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current ()

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr.)

Catalogue number

SIST3 SISP3

N 3 NT 3

up to 630 up to 630

600 600

965 987

12300 12300P

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60269-1 EN 60269-2

Fuse links for high power safety devices The series fuse links for high power safety devices is designed for short circuit protection. They are distinguished with high speed of operation and high reliability. The element is a ceramic (porcelain) body filled with fine quartz sand for voltaic arc lowering. In the ceramic body is mounted a fusible, specially profiled wafer connecting the current leading terminals. These terminals are manufactured of copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of knives to provide more contact surface. The fuse links correspond to gL gG class which means that they are with common function and normal response time. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: 120 kAeff * IP code: IP 00 * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C * Altitude: up to 2000m

G2

Fuse link type

Overall dimensions (mm)

A NT00 NT 0 NT1 NT 2 NT 3 78 125 135 150 150

B 40 68 68 68 68

C 15 15 21 27 33

D 29 29 48 58 67

H 56.5 56.5 62 72 84.5

High power safety devices and isolating switches Fuse links for high power safety devices
Type In (A)

117

www.elmarkgroup.eu
NT00 25 NT00 32 NT00 40 NT00 50 500,600 10005 NT00 63 500,600 10006 NT00 80 500,600 10008 NT00 100 500,600 10009 NT00 125 500,600 10012 NT00 160 500, 600 10016

NT00 16

Un(V) 500,600 500,600 Cat.

500,600 500,600 10003 10004

10001

10002

Type In (A)

NT 0 16

NT 0 25

NT 0 32

NT 0 40

NT 0 50 500,600 10050

NT 0 63 500,600 10063

NT 0 80 500,600 10080

NT 0 100 500,600 10090

NT 0 125 500,600 10092

NT 0 160 500, 600 10096

Un(V) 500,600 500,600 Cat.

500,600 500,600 10032 10040

10015

10025

Type In (A) Un(V) Cat.

NT 1 80

NT 1 100

NT 1 125 500,600 10112

NT 1 160 500,600 10116

NT 1 200 500,600 10120

NT 1 225 500,600 10122

NT 1 250 500, 600 10125

G2

500,600 500,600 10108 10110

Type In (A) Un(V) Cat.

NT 2 160 500,600 10216

NT 2 200 500,600 10220

NT 2 250 500,600 10225

NT 2 315 500,600 10231

NT 2 400 500, 600 10240

Type In (A) Un(V) Cat.

NT 3 500 500,600 10350

NT 3 630 500,600 10363

118

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3

High power safety devices and isolating switches Isolating switches

Designed in two types horizontal and vertical. They represent a combination of low voltage isolating switch and high power safety devices mounted in a common plastic corpus. They are used for low voltage distribution boards and complete transformer substations (CTS) where visible circuit distribution is necessary. They provide safety and convenience at fuse links change. The plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous circuits switching on/off. The lid allows easy removing which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical isolating switches are mounted directly to the power supply rails which enables the exploitation and improves the safety of the staff. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted fuse links * Number of poles: 3 * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles * IP code: IP 40 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Isolating switch type

Overall dimensions (mm)

A 160 184 210 256

B 73 128 145 175

C 82 111.5 128 142.5

D 45 66 88 94.5

E 151 214.5 255 267

THB -160 THB - 250 THB - 400

G3
THB - horizontal

THB - 630

Type In (A) Un(V) Fuse link size Cat. N

THB 160 500, 660 NT00 44801

THB 250 500, 660 NT1 44802

THB 400 500, 660 NT2 44803

THB 630 500, 660 NT3 44804

Type In (A) Un(V) Fuse link size Cat. N

HG2B 160 500, 660 NT00 44805

HG2B 250 500, 660 NT1 44806

HG2B 400 500, 660 NT2 44807

HG2B 630 500, 660 NT3 44808

HG2B - vertical

High power safety devices and isolating switches Switch disconnector

119

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The series of switch disconnectors EL-D02 are developed for short-circuit protection. They have a high speed of start and high reliability. They have a plastic body of inflammable plastics adapted for mounting on a DIN rail, where a porcelain round plug, which is filled with fine quartz sand for extinguishing the electric arc. In this ceramic body is mounted melting, specifically profiled plate, which connects the input power terminals. These terminals are produced from copper alloy with especially laid nickel layer and contact with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. Locking system for the security plug on replacement of burnt out. Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: 600V * Insulation voltage: >2500V * Rated current on short-circuit: 120 * Direct mounting to the load * Two insulated points to the load * Protection rate: IP 44 * Cross-section of the supply conductors: up to 35mm2 * Environmental temperature: -5 +55 * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-3 VDE 0638

Type

Number of poles

Rated current () 32 63 63 63 63 63

Type of the fuse

Catalogue number

Box / Carton

EL - D02-32 EL - D02-63 EL - D02-63 EL - D02-63 EL - D02-63 EL - D02-63

1P+N 1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N

RO 26/32 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63

10D0232 10D0261 10D0262 10D0265 10D0263 10D0264

6 / 180 6 / 180 3 / 90 3 / 90 2 / 60 1 / 120

G4

Type of the fuse

Voltage (V) 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

Rated current () 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Size of the fuse

Catalogue number 10R0232 10R0234 10R0236 10R0240 10R0246 10R0248 10R0245 10R0243 10R0640 10R0650 10R0660

RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63

12.5x31.5mm 12.5x31.5mm 12.5x31.5mm 12.5x31.5mm 12.5x31.5mm 12.5x31.5mm 12.5x31.5mm 12.5x31.5mm 15x35mm 15x35mm 15x35mm

120

www.elmarkgroup.eu
c

Industrial plugs and sockets Industrial plugs

Industrial plugs and sockets Ht/HTN type They are specially developed plugs and contacts designed for mounting in industrial buildings or outdoors. Made of special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard IEC 309-1 and provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. They are designed in types for indoors and outdoors mounting, and with movable or static plugs and sockets. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted protection in the boards * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles * IP code: IP 44/67 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C * Altitude: up to 2000m * Plugs and sockets: 6h

a b

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package /Box

HT-013 HT-023

16 32

1P+N+E 1P+N+E

230 230

121 / 84 / 53 138 / 92 / 63

44 44

37013 37023

10 / 100 10 / 100

H1
Model Order type number In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) a /b /c Ingress protection rating IP Catalogue number Package /Box

HT-014 HT-024 HT-034 HT-044

16 32 63 125

3P+E 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E

400 400 400 400

121 / 84 / 51 138 / 92 / 63 230 / 109 / 36 295 / 124 / 50

44 44 44 44

37014 37024 37034 37044

10 / 100 10 / 60 1 / 10 1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package /Box

HT-015 HT-025 HT-035 HT-045

16 32 63 125

3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E

400 400 400 400

129 / 92 / 62 149 / 97 / 70 230 / 109 / 36 295 / 124 / 50

44 44 44 44

37015 37025 37035 37045

10 / 100 10 / 60 1 / 10 1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package /Box

HTN 0131 HTN 0231

16 32

1P+N+E 1P+N+E

230 230

120/71/12 150/93/17

67 67

37131 37231

1 / 40 1 / 40

Industrial plugs and sockets Static industrial plugs

Model Order type number In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

121

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Ingress protection rating IP Catalogue number Package/Box

HTN 0141 HTN 0241 HTN 0341 HTN 0441

16 32 63 125

3P+E 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E

400 400 400 400

125/79/12 150/93/17 230/109/36 230/109/36

67 67 67 67

37141 37241 37341 37441

10 / 60 10 / 40 1 / 10 1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HTN 0151 HTN 0251 HTN 0351 HTN 0451

16 32 63 125

3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E

400 400 400 400

133/87/12 155/99.5/17 230/109/36 295/124/50

67 67 67 67

37151 37251 37351 37451

10 / 60 10 / 40 1 / 10 1 / 10

Static industrial plugs

H2
Model Order type number In (A) Un (V) Dimensions (mm) a /b /c Ingress protection rating IP Catalogue number Package/Box

Poles

HT-513 HT-523

16 32

1P+N+E 1P+N+E

230 230

121/79 131/83

44 44

37513 37523

10 / 60 10 / 40

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT 514 HT 524 HT 534

16 32 63

3P+E 3P+E 3P+E

400 400 400

121/76 131/83 131/83

44 44 44

37514 37524 37534

10 / 60 10 / 40 10 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT 515 HT 525 HT 535

16 32 63

3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E

400 400 400

123/79 132/84 132/84

44 44 44

37515 37525 37535

10 / 60 10 / 40 1 / 10

122

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Industrial plugs and sockets Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring

58 70.5

13

32.5

20

34 5 Pg21

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-113 HT-123

16 32

1P+N+E 1P+N+E

230 230

126 / 86 141 / 97

44 44

37113 37123

1 / 60 1 / 60

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-114 HT-124 HT-134 HT-144

16 32 63 125

3P+E 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E

400 400 400 400

132 / 91 141 / 96 193 / 122 220 / 140

44 44 44 44

37114 37124 37134 37144

10 / 60 10 / 60 1 / 10 1 / 10

H3

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-115 HT-125 HT-135 HT-145

16 32 63 125

3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E

400 400 400 400

129 / 96 141 / 98 193 / 122 220 / 140

44 44 44 44

37115 37125 37135 37145

10 / 60 10 / 60 1 / 10 1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HTN 1131 HTN 1231

16 32

1P+N+E 1P+N+E

230 230

101/150/93.5 114/162/93.5

67 67

37731 37631

10 / 40 10 / 40

108

Industrial plugs and sockets Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring
Model Order type number In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

123

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Ingress protection rating IP Catalogue number Package/Box

HTN 1141 HTN 1241 HTN 1341 HTN 1441

16 32 63 125

3P+E 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E

400 400 400 400

104/150/93.5 116/162/93.5 171/170/230 171/170/230

67 67 67 67

37741 37641 37842 37844

10 / 60 10 / 40 1 / 10 1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HTN 1151 HTN 1251 HTN 1351 HTN 1451

16 32 63 125

3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E

400 400 400 400

107/150/93.5 116/162/93.5 171/170/230 171/170/230

67 67 67 67

37751 37651 37852 37854

10 / 60 10 / 40 1 / 10 1 / 10

Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring

H4
Model Order type number In (A) Un (V) Dimensions (mm) a /b /c Ingress protection rating IP Catalogue number Package/Box

Poles

HT-213 HT-223

16 32

1P+N+E 1P+N+E

230 230

130 / 96 149 / 90

44 44

37213 37223

10 / 100 10 / 60

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-214 HT-224 HT-234 HT-244

16 32 63 125

3P+E 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E

400 400 400 400

131 / 96 149 / 90 230/109 290/124

44 44 44 44

37214 37224 37234 37244

10 / 100 10 / 60 1 / 10 1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-215 HT-225 HT-235 HT-245

16 32 63 125

3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E

400 400 400 400

139 / 90 154 / 100 230/100 290/124

44 44 44 44

37215 37225 37235 37245

10 / 60 10 / 60 1 / 10 1 / 10

124

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Model Order type number In (A) Un (V)

Industrial plugs and sockets Industrial built in contacts

Poles Dimensions (mm) a /b Ingress protection rating IP Catalogue number Package/Box

HTN 2131 HTN 2231

16 32

1P+N+E 1P+N+E

230 230

131/90 149/90

67 67

37831 37931

1 / 60 1 / 60

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HTN 2141 HTN 2241 HTN 2341 HTN 2441

16 32 63 125

3P+E 3P+E 3P+E 3P+E

400 400 400 400

131/76 149/90 271/115 295/137

67 67 67 67

37841 37941 37942 37943

10 / 60 10 / 40 1 / 10 1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Ingress Dimensions (mm) protection a /b rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

H5
HTN 2151 HTN 2251 HTN 2351 HTN 2451 16 32 63 125 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 3P+N+E 400 400 400 400 139/90 154/100 240/112 300/126 67 67 67 67 37851 37951 37952 37953 10 / 60 10 / 40 1 / 10 1/6

Industrial built in contacts

Model Order type number In (A) Poles Un (V) Ingress Dimensions (mm) protection a /b rating IP Catalogue number Package/Box

HT-413 HT-423

16 32

1P+N+E

230 230

70/85 80/97

44 44

37413 37423

10 / 100 10 / 60

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Ingress Dimensions (mm) protection a /b rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-414 HT-424

16 32

3P+E

400 400

70/85 80/97

44 44

37414 37424

10 / 100 10 / 60

110

Industrial plugs and sockets Distribution boxes with industrial contacts

Model Order type number In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions (mm) a /b

125

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Ingress protection rating IP Catalogue number Package/Box

HT-415 HT-425

16 32

3P+N+E

400 400

70/85 80/97

44 44

37415 37425

10 / 60 10 / 60

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-105SR

16

230

70/70

44

37105

20 / 200

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

213L-2P-W

16

1P+N+E

230

450

44

37003

1 / 42

H6

Distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets and protection devices They are specially designed distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets fabric cabled with possibility for protection devices mounting (breakers, residual current devices). They are designed for building sites mounting, industrial projects for power supply of mobile movable consumers, exhibition centers, outdoor concerts or repair- reconstruct operations with temporary character. The boxes are made of special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard IEC 309-1 and provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 400V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted safety fuses and residual current devices * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Power supply cable: 5x10mm2 * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles Inlet power supply Outlets Type conductor(mm2) * IP code: IP 44 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55C 3 contacts 16A 32.5 EDB 100 - 401 * Altitude: up to 2000m 1P+N+E * Overall dimensions of the box: 136x94x425 mm
EDB 100 - 402 EDB 200 - 401 EDB 100 - 501* 52.5 32.5 3x2.5 1 contact 16A 3P+N+E 2 contacts 16A 1P+N+E 3 contacts 32A 1P+N+E 3 contacts 16A 1P+N+E

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2; EN 60 529

Catalogue number

53401 53402 53421 53501*

Note: * The distribution box is supplied with extension cable with section 3x2.5mm2 and length 1.5m

126

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Plastic distribution boards
Plastic distribution boards for exposed wiring The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * wear resistance to heat: UL 94 * IP code: IP 40 * Class of current limiting: 2

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208 EN60439-1; EN 60 439-3

Number of rows

Module capacity (number of devices)

Terminal strips number

Openings number

Dimensions (mm) L W H

Catalogue number

Package / Box

1 1 1 1 1 2 3

4 6 8 12 18 24 36

2 2 2 3 4 6 8

9 9 14 17 25 34 43

110 150 190 260 365 270 310

205 205 205 205 220 330 475

75 75 75 75 75 75 85

60040 60060 60080 60120 60180 60240 60360

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5

Plastic distribution boards for buried wiring The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted through building-in in openings on the wall under plaster or in hollow-wall (through special clasps). Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * wear resistance to heat: UL 94 * IP code: IP 40 * Class of current limiting: 2

I1

Number of rows

Module capacity (number of devices)

Terminal strips number

Openings number

Dimensions (mm) L W H

Catalogue number

Package / Box

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208 EN 60 439-1;EN 60 439-3

1 1 1 1 1 2 3

4 6 8 12 18 24 36

2 2 2 3 4 6 8

9 9 14 17 25 34 43

110 150 190 260 365 270 310

205 205 205 205 220 330 475

75 75 75 75 75 75 85

60041 60061 60081 60121 60181 60241 60361

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5

Note: At building-in in hollow-wall it is supplied with clasps for hollow-wall 4pcs with catalogue number 60085. There are 10 sets of clasps in a package.

catalogue number 60085

112

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Metal distribution boards
Moisture-proof distribution boards for exposed wiring

127

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical installation current circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90. They are made of white non-self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides IP code IP 55. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * wear resistance to heat: UL 94 * IP code: IP 55 * Class of current limiting: 2

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 209 EN 60 439-1;EN 60 439-3

Type

Number of rows

Module capacity (number of devices)

Terminal strips number

Openings number

Dimensions (mm) L W H

Catalogue number

Package / Box

WP4 WP6 WP8 WP12 WP18 WP24

1 1 1 1 1 2

4 6 8 12 18 24

2 2 2 3 4 6

9 9 14 17 25 34

214 214 214 270 378 340

127 162 216 214 233 288

93 93 93 93 93 93

60100 60101 60102 60103 60104 60105

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5

Stainless metal cabinets for distribution boards The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal cabinet with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of whole stainless sheet steel processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low voltage distribution boards in food, wine and tobacco industries and at special requirements regarding the corrosion wear I2 resistance in industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Maximum current: up to 800A * Material: stainless steel * IP code: IP 65 Mounting: * vertically to a flat surface

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 209 EN 60 439-1;EN 60 439-3

Type

Thickness of sheet metal (mm)

Metal board dimensions (mm) L (height) W (width) H (depth)

Catalogue number

SXF 25/25/15 SXF 30/25/15 SXF 40/30/20 SXF 50/40/20 SXF 60/40/20 SXF 70/50/20 SXF 80/60/25 SXF 100/80/30 SXF 120/80/30

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5

250 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200

250 250 300 400 400 500 600 800 800

150 150 200 200 200 200 250 300 300

54025 54030 54040 54050 54060 54070 54080 54100 54120

128

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Metal cabinets for distribution boards

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Metal distribution boards

The metal cabinets are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal box with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of whole sheet metal processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low voltage distribution boards in housing buildings, offices, shops and industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Maximum current: up to 800A * Material: steel * Coating: powder style painting * IP code: IP 65 Mounting: * vertically to a flat surface

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3

Type

Thickness of the steel metal (mm)

Metal board dimensions (mm) L (height) W (widht) H (depth)

Nominal working current In (A)

Catalogue number

JXF 25/25/15 JXF 25/30/15 JXF 30/25/15

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

250 250 300 300 400 400 500 400 600 700 800 1000 1200 1400 1800 1800

250 300 250 400 300 500 400 600 400 500 600 800 800 800 800 1000

150 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 250 300 300 300 300 300

80 100 100 160 160 250 250 250 250 350 400 630 630 800 1000 1250

53025 53026 53030 53031 53040 53041 53050 53051 53060 53070 53080 53100 53120 53140 53188 53180

I2

JXF 30/40/20 JXF 40/30/20 JXF 40/50/20 JXF 50/40/20 JXF 40/60/20 JXF 60/40/20 JXF 70/50/20 JXF 80/60/25 JXF 100/80/30 JXF 120/80/30 JXF 140/80/30 JXF 180/80/30 JXF 180/100/30* Note: *Metal board with double door

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Module plastic distribution boards
Module boxes

129

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Plastic distributor-boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at cable installations laying or as electronic meter boards. Manufactured of polycarbonate plastic or thermostatic fibre glass material. Chemical, thermal and UV rays wear resistance. The boxes can be connected together to form boards with different dimensions. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 690V * Maximum current: up to 800A * Weight: 1.21(g/cm3) * Dielectrical strength: 1014 (m) * Inflammability: 960C * Operating temperature: -35 to + 40C * Material: polycarbonate/ fibre glass * IP code: IP 44 * Subject to recycling Mounting: * vertically to a flat surface

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439 -1 EN 60439 -5

Box type

Type of material

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue number

PXF315/280/120 polycarbonate L

315

280

120

53221

Box type

Type of material

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue number

H NXF320/620/250 NXF470/620/250 NXF620/620/250 L fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass 320 470 620 620 620 620 250 250 250 53200 53201 53202

I3

Box type

Type of material

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue number

H NXF780/620/250 NXF930/620/250 NXF1080/620/250 NXF1230/620/250 L fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass 780 930 1080 1230 620 620 620 620 250 250 250 250 53203 53204 53205 53206

Box type

Type of material

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue number

NXF320/920/250 NXF470/920/250 NXF620/920/250 NXF780/920/250 NXF930/920/250 NXF1080/920/250 NXF1230/920/250

Base type

fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass
Type of material

320 470 620 780 930 1080 1230

L (mm)

920 920 920 920 920 920 920

H1 (mm)

250 250 250 250 250 250 250

W (mm)

53207 53208 53209 53210 53211 53212 53213

Catalogue number

H1

NXFC320/1215/250 NXFC470/1215/250 NXFC620/1215/250 NXFC780/1215/250 NXFC930/1215/250 NXFC1080/1215/250 NXFC1230/1215/250

fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass fibre glass

320 470 620 780 930 1080 1230

1215 1215 1215 1215 1215 1215 1215

250 250 250 250 250 250 250

53214 53215 53216 53217 53218 53219 53220

Note: At order a box with depth 320mm can be manufactured

130

Boxes and cable cabinets for electric panels

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cable support systems

The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production premises for direct mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and accessories with standard lengths and sizes, which are assembled on the basis of a click system. They allow quick construction of cable systems with many angles and derivations. The offered choice is from tin with thickness up to 1.0 mm. and standard length of 3 m.
Type Type Symbol Width mm Height mm Tin thickness mm Length of the channel m Weight kg Catalogue number

Channel perforated Channel perforated Channel perforated Channel perforated Channel perforated

PK -50/30* - 100/60 PK - 200/60 PK - 300/60 PK - 400/60

50 100 200 300 400

60 60 60 60 60

0.55 0.55 0.55 0.7 0.7

3 3 3 3 3

3.4 4.40 5.30 9.20 12.0

56PK5030 5610060 56PK20060 56PK30060 56PK40060

Note: Channel perforated PK50/30 is not a click system

Type Type Symbol Width mm Height mm Tin thickness mm Length of the channel m Weight kg Catalogue number

-derivation -derivation -derivation -derivation -derivation

TS - 50/30 TS - 100/60 TS - 200/60 TS - 300/60 TS - 400/60

50 100 200 300 400

60 60 60 60 60

0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

1.0 1.30 1.95 3.15 5.05

56S05030 56TS10060 56TS20060 56TS30060 56TS40060

Type

Type Symbol

Width mm

Height mm

Tin thickness mm

Length of the channel m

Weight kg

Catalogue number

Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle

KS -50/30 KS - 100/60 KS - 200/60 KS - 300/60 KS - 400/60

50 100 200 300 400

60 60 60 60 60

0.55 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

0.55 0.78 1.64 2.51 3.95

56KS05030 56KS10060 56KS20060 56KS30060 56KS40060

I4
Type Type Symbol Width mm Height mm Tin thickness mm Length of the channel m Weight kg Catalogue number

Upright lid Upright lid Upright lid Upright lid Angle lid Angle lid Angle lid Angle lid -lid -lid -lid -lid

PPK -100 PPK - 200 PPK - 300 PPK - 400 PKS - 100 PKS - 200 PKS - 300 PKS - 400 PTS - 100 PTS - 200 PTS - 300 PTS - 400

100 200 300 400 100 200 300 400 100 200 300 400

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

0.55 0.55 0.7 0.7 0.55 0.55 0.7 0.7 0.55 0.55 0.7 0.7

3 3 3 3 -

1.16 2.66 4.00 5.50 0.39 0.51 1.33 2.60 0.82 1.10 2.45 3.45

56PPK10060 56PPK20060 56PPK30060 56PPK40060 56PKS10060 56PKS20060 56PKS30060 56PKS40060 56PTS10060 56PTS20060 56PTS30060 56PTS40060

Type

Type Symbol

Height mm

Tin thickness mm

Length m

Catalogue number

Universal click Wall carrier Wall carrier Wall carrier Wall carrier Ceiling carrier Ceiling carrier Ceiling carrier Ceiling carrier Ceiling carrier Bolt set

KLS 60 NSC100 NSC200 NSC300 NSC400 NLK 50 NLK 100 NLK 200 NLK 300 NLK 400 VE -03

45

1.0

0.3

56KLS6000 56NSC100 56NSC200 56NSC300 56NSC400 56NLK 50 56NLK 100 56NLK 200 56NLK 300 56NLK 400 56VE0300

114

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Moisture-proof junction boxes
Moisture-proof junction boxes

131

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at cable installations laying. Manufactured of ABS material with openings for inlet-outlet conductors, firmed with rubber stoppers to provide the corresponding IP code. Chemical, thermal and UV rays wear resistance. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60670-1 IP44 Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Material: ABS * IP code: IP 44/66 Mounting: * vertically to a flat surface

IP44

Box type

Box dimensions (mm)

Gaskets dimensions (mm)

IP54
WB50/50 WB80/50 WB85/85/50 WB100/100/70 WB150/110/70 WB150/150/70 WB200/100/70 WB200/155/80

D 50 80 -

L 85

W 85

H 50 50 50

d 22.5 22.5 22.5 30 28 35 35 35 35 35 35

C 17 17 18.5 23 23 29 29 29 29 29 29

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

44 44 44 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54

8070 8071 8072 8073 8076 8074 8075 8077 8078 8079 8080

I5

100 100 70 150 110 70 150 150 70 200 100 70 200 155 80 255 200 80 300 250 120 400 350 120

IP54

WB255/200/80 WB300/250/120 WB400/350/120

132

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Hydraulic crimping pliers HT - 300 type

Instruments Hydraulic crimping instruments

Catalogue number: 59300

Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Crimping head turning at 360 which facilitates the crimping of static conductors * Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2 - Cu conductors from 16 to 240 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 60kN * Width of the element: 17mm * Weight of the instrument: 3.3 kg * Length: 460mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Hydraulic crimping pliers KYQ-300B type Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2 - Cu conductors from 16 to 240 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 16T * Width of the element: 22mm * Weight of the instrument: 6.8 kg * Length: 500mm * Used hydraulic oil: #23 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 23) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Catalogue number: 59302

J1

Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK-300 type Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2 - Cu conductors from 16 to 240 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 16T * Width of the element: 22mm * Weight of the instrument: 6.3 kg * Length: 500mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Catalogue number: 59301

Instruments Hydraulic piercing instruments

Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK 70 type

133

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Catalogue number: 59303

Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 4 to 70mm 2 - Cu conductors from 4 to 70 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 8T * Width of the element: 10mm * Weight of the instrument: 2.8 kg * Length: 310mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

HYDRAULIC PIERCING INSTRUMENTS Hydraulic piercing pliers WK-8 type Functions: * Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion Technical data: * Piercing head turning at 360 * Form of the cutting element: round * Size of the cutting element: 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm * Piercing capacity: - sheet metal 3mm openings up to 30mm - sheet metal 2mm openings up to 60mm * Element pressing power: 80kN * Thickness of the element: 25mm * Weight of the instrument: 3.5 kg * Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder J2 * Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands 16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002

Catalogue number: 54000

Hydraulic piercing press SYK 15 type Functions: * Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion Technical data: * Protracting piercing head supplied with a hose for the hydraulic oil that gives possibility for piercing openings everywhere on the metal surface * Form of the cutting element: - round - square * Size of the cutting element: - square: 32x32mm - round openings: 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm * Piercing capacity: - sheet metal 3mm openings up to 60.8mm - sheet metal 2mm openings up to 115.5mm - square opening up to 110x110mm * Element pressing power: 15T * Thickness of the element: 25mm * Weight of the instrument: 11.5 kg * Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder * Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands 16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002

Catalogue number: 54001

134

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC 325 type Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 150mm 2 - for copper conductors up to 150mm 2 * Cutting power: 15T * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet * Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism * Weight of the instrument: 0.58kg * Length of the instrument: 260mm * Package: blister

Instruments Mechanical cutting instruments

Catalogue number: 59305

Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC 400 type Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 400mm 2 - for copper conductors up to 350mm 2 * Cutting power: 15T * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet * Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism * Weight of the instrument: 1.25kg * Length of the instrument: 360mm * Package: blister

Catalogue number: 59304

Mechanical cable cutting pliers HS 250 type

J3

Catalogue number: 59306

Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 240mm 2 - for copper conductors up to 185mm 2 * Weight of the instrument: 1.43kg * Length of the instrument: 540mm * Package: blister

MANUAL INSTRUMENTS Instrument for conductor stripping HS 2103 type Functions: * Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm 2 * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm 2 * Crimping of cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of automobile high voltage conductors * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm 2 * Maximum section of the cable: up to 6mm 2 * Weight of the instrument: 0.21kg * Length of the instrument: 213mm * Package: blister

Catalogue number: 59310

Instruments Hand instruments

Instrument for conductor stripping HS 2603 type Functions: * Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2 * Crimping of cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Maximum section of the cable: - cleaning of a rigid conductor: from 0.5 to 6mm2 - cleaning of a flexible conductor: from 0.75 to 6mm2 * Presence of openings for cutting of bolts: from M2.5 to M5 * Weight of the instrument: 0.32kg * Length of the instrument: 240mm * Package: blister Instrument for manual crimping of conductors HD 005 type Functions: * Crimping of naked cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 10mm2 * Form of the crimping head: hexahedral * Weight of the instrument: 0.49kg * Length of the instrument: 220mm * Package: blister
Catalogue number: 59308

135

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Catalogue number: 59311

Instrument for manual crimping of conductors G 301H type Functions: * Crimping of isolated cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Form of the crimping head: hexahedral * Weight of the instrument: 0.49kg * Length of the instrument: 220mm * Package: blister
Catalogue number: 59307

J4

Instrument for manual crimping of conductors SN 003 type Functions: * Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining bushes Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6 to 16mm2 * Form of the crimping head: hexahedral * Weight of the instrument: 0.39kg * Length of the instrument: 190mm * Package: blister
Catalogue number: 59309

Instrument for manual crimping of conductors HY 200R type Functions: * Used for cleaning and crimping of 4, 6, and 8 core telephone or grid conductors * Crimping of terminals/couplings for telephone or computer grids Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors for 4, 6 or 8 cores * Weight of the instrument: 0.55kg * Length of the instrument: 200mm * Package: blister
Catalogue number: 59312

136

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Non-insulated butt terminals with coating for crimping

Consumatives and cable terminals Non-insulated butt terminals

They are copper pipe with galvanic tin coating. They are used for joining of copper conductors rigid or multiple conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: tin * Application: general Standard: EN 61 238-1
Type Length L (mm) Outer diameter D (mm) Inner diameter d (mm) Cable (mm2) Catalogue number

GTY-4 GTY-6 GTY-10 GTY-16 GTY-25 GTY-35 GTY-50 GTY-70 GTY-95 GTY-120 GTY-150 GTY-185 GTY-240

20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

5 5.3 6.3 7.5 9 10.8 12.5 14.5 17 19 21 23 26

3 3.7 4.5 5.7 7.2 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.7 15 16.7 18.5 21

4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240

59213 59201 59202 59203 59204 59205 59206 59207 59208 59209 59210 59211 59212

Bimetal non-insulated butt terminals with coating for crimping They are pipe made of two metals copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for joining copper and aluminum conductors rigid or multiple conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. They are used for protection against electrochemical corrosion got at two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current feed. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Technical data: * Material: copper aluminum alloy * Coating: none * Application: general for joining of two types of conductors

K1

Standard: EN 61 238-1

Butt terminal type

d1

D1

d2

D2

l1

l2

Catalogue number

GTL - 1- 16 GTL - 1- 25 GTL - 1- 35 GTL - 1- 50 GTL - 1- 70 GTL - 1- 95 GTL - 1- 120 GTL - 1- 150 GTL - 1- 185 GTL - 1- 240

5 6 7 8.5 9.5 11.5 13.5 15 17 19

9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 26

6 7 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.5 15 17 18.5 21

10 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 30

30 30 30 32 38 40 42 44 46 54

30 33 40 42 50 50 55 55 60 60

75 82 90 95 105 110 112 118 125 130

59214 59215 59216 59217 59218 59219 59220 59221 59222 59223

Consumatives and cable terminals Non-insulated terminals

Non-insulated cable terminals with coating for crimping

137

www.elmarkgroup.eu

They are used for joining copper conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are offered with standard length and extended base. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: tin Standard: EN 61 238-1 * Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.

JM

Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet is made under special technology the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Technical data: * Material: copper aluminum Standard: EN 61 238-1 * Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.

Dimensions: Non-insulated cable terminals for crimping

Shoe type d1 (mm) D (mm) d2 (mm) L (mm) Catalogue number

Dimensions: Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping

Shoe type d1 (mm) D (mm) d2 (mm) L (mm) l (mm) B (mm) Catalogue number

K2

JM - 2.5 JM - 4 JM - 6 JM - 6 J - 10 JM - 10 JM - 16 JM - 16 JM - 16 JM - 25 JM - 25 JM - 35 JM - 35 JM - 35 JM - 50 JM - 50 JM - 50 JM - 70 JM - 70 JM - 95 JM - 95 JM - 120 JM - 120 JM - 150 JM - 185 JM - 185 JM - 240

2.2 3.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 4.8 5.5 5.5 5.5 7 7 8.2 8.2 8.2 9.8 9.8 9.8 11.5 11.5 13.8 13.8 15.5 15.5 16.5 18.8 18.8 21

4.5 4.8 5.5 5.5 6.8 6.8 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 10.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 17.5 17.5 19.5 19.5 21 23.5 23.5 26.5

6 6 6 8 6 8 6 8 10 8 10 8 10 12 8 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 12 12 16 16

24 24 24 24 25.5 25.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 34 34 38 38 38 45 45 45 50 50 55.5 55.5 63 63 71 78 78 92

59240 59241 59035 59059 59036 59037 59038 59039 59040 59041 59042 59043 59044 59045 59046 59047 59048 59049 59050 59051 59052 59053 59054 59055 59056 59057 59058

DTL - 16 DTL - 25 DTL - 35 DTL - 50 DTL - 70 DTL - 95 DTL - 120 DTL - 150 DTL - 185 DTL - 240

6 7 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.5 15 16.5 18.5 21

11 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 30

8 8 10 10 12 12 14 14 16 16

70 75 85 90 102 112 120 126 133 140

30 34 38 40 48 50 53 56 58 60

16 18 20.5 23 26 28 30 34 37 40

59224 59225 59226 59227 59228 59229 59230 59231 59232 59233

138

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Insulated butt connectors

Consumatives and cable terminals Insulated terminals

They are cable butt terminal with cross section up to 6mm2 with polyvinylchloride insulation. They are used for joining/extending multiple conductors with section up to 6mm. It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: polyvinylchloride * Application: general for joining copper conductors Standard: EN 61 238-1
Colour Length (mm) Package (pcs.) Type number Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number red blue yellow

16 100 PVT 1.25 1 59015

25 100 BV 1.25 1 59001

16 100 PVT 2 1.5-2.5 59034

25 100 BV 2 1.5-2.5 59002

20 100 PVT 5.5 4-6 59014

25 100 BV 5.5 4-6 59003

Insulated cable terminals They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with polyvinylchloride. They are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores from bending and breaking in the joining point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct contact to the current leading elements. They are used for connectors with section up to 6mm. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: polyvinylchloride * Application: general for joining copper conductors * Ambient temperature: -10 to +75C
MALE Catalogue number

MDD - red 1.25 - 187 59012 FDD - red 1.25 - 187 187 1 59008
white

MDD - red 1.25 - 250 59009 FDD - red 1.25 - 250 250 1 59006
red black grey

MDD - blue 2 - 187 59013 FDD - blue 2 - 187 187 1.5-2.5 59007
orange green

MDD - blue 2 - 250 59011 FDD - blue 2 - 250 250 1.5-2.5 59004
dark green milky yellow

MDD - yellow 5.5 - 250 59010 FDD - yellow 5.5 - 250 250 4-6 59005
black greyyellow

K3

FEMALE Shoe width Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number Colour Type Terminal length (mm) Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number Colour Type Package (pcs.) Size of the opening (mm) Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number

blue 7508 8 0.75 59024

red

0508 8 0.5 59023

1008 8 1.0 59025

1510 10 1.5 59026

2512 12 2.5 59027 blue

4012 12 4.0 59028

6018 18 6.0 59029

10-18 18 10 59030

16-18 18 16 59031 yellow

25-16 16 25 59032

35-25 25 35 59033

RVL 1.25-4 100 4 1 59021

RVL 1.25-5 100 5 1 59022

RVL 2-4 100 4 1.5-2.5 59018

RVL 2-5 100 5 1.5-2.5 59019

RVL 5.5-4 100 4 4-6 59020

RV 5.5-5 100 5 4-6 59016

RV 5.5-6 100 6 4-6 59017

Consumatives and cable terminals Insulated terminals

MALE Shoe width Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number

139

www.elmarkgroup.eu
PTV - red 1.25 - 10 1.9 0.25-1.5 59101 PTV - red 1.25 - 12 1.9 0.25-2.5 59102 PTV - blue 2 - 10 1.9 1.5-2.5 59103 PTV - blue 2 - 12 1.9 1.5-2.5 59104 PTV - yellow 5.5 - 13 2.9 4-6 59105

MALE Shoe width Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number

PBDD - red 1.25 - 250 6.3 0.25-1.5 59106

PBDD - blue 2 - 250 6.3 1.5-2.5 59107

PBDD - yellow 5.5 - 250 6.3 4-6 59108

MALE Shoe width Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number

MPD - red 1.25 - 156 6.3 0.25-1.5 59109

MPD - blue 2 - 195 6.3 1.5-2.5 59110

MPD - yellow 5.5 - 195 6.3 4-6 59111

MALE Shoe width Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number

MDFN - red 1.25 - 250 4 0.25-1.5 59112

MDFN - blue 2 - 250 4 1.5-2.5 59113

MDFN - yellow 5 - 250 5 4-6 59114

K3

Length (mm) Package (pcs.) Type number Conductor (mm2) Catalogue number

18.1 100 CHS3 0.25-1.5 59115

20.1 100 CHS4 1.5-2.5 59116

25.5 100 CHS5 4-6 59117

27.3 100 CHS6 8 59118

140

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cable glands PG type

Consumatives and cable terminals Consumatives

They are designed to provide the IP code IP at conductors passing through the walls of the electrical distribution boxes. They represent a plastic pipe supplied with the corresponding gaskets and nuts. All cable gland elements are made of high quality plastic (PE) or rubber. Technical data: * Material: polyethylene (PE) * Colour: gray * Application: general * Ambient temperature: -40 to +85C * IP code: IP 55

Standard: EN 60 423; 4858-81

Cable gland type

Overlapping field

(mm)

B (mm)

d (mm)

D (mm)

L1 (mm)

L2 (mm)

Catalogue number

PG-7 PG-9 PG-11 PG-13.5 PG-16 PG-19 PG-21 PG-24 PG-29 PG-36 PG-42 PG-48

3.5-6.8 5-8 6-10 7-12 8-14 9-17 10-18 15-22 16-24 18-28 26-362 32-39

16.3 18.9 21.7 23.6 26.5 29 32.3 32.6 41.1 52 57.4 65.2

18 21.7 23.5 26.5 29.3 32 35.6 32.6 45.4 58 61.9 70.7

12 15.5 18.5 20 21.5 23 28 29.8 36 46 51 58

6.6 8.5 10.4 13 14 17 19 24 26 31.5 37.6 43

10 10 8.5 10 9 12 12 13 12.5 12.5 17.5 21

22 25 29 29 29 29 35 31 40 45 47 50

500070 500090 500110 500135 500160 500190 500210 500240 500290 500360 500420 500480

Zero rails They represent a brass rail with rectangular section with fabric made openings for the conductors and bolts for clamping of the conductor. They are offered in types with insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used in the electrical distribution boxes for zeroing and earthing. Technical data: * Material: brass for the current leading elements * Insulation material: plastic * Colour: gray/blue * Application: general * Ambient temperature: -40 to +85C Zero rails
Rail type Lenght L (mm) Height H (mm) Widht W (mm) D (mm) Bolt Number of terminals Catalogue number

K4

BRASS

1000

7.8

14002

ZERO insulated

250

16

14012

Zero terminals
SP 031
Rail type L A B C D M Catalogue number

SP 029

SP 029-4 SP 029-6 SP 029-8 SP 029-10 SP 029-12 SP 031-4 SP 031-6 SP 031-8 SP 031-10 SP 031-12

82.9.4 100.9 118.9 136.9 182.4 59.5 76.5 93 111 128

21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5

12 12 12 12 12 12.4 12.4 12.4 12.4 12.4

70.5 88.5 106.5 124.5 170 48.5 65.5 82 100 117

6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5

5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10

14204 14206 14208 14210 14212 14304 14306 14308 14310 14312

Consumatives and cable terminals Consumatives

Insulating PVC tape with dimensions 0.15mm / 19mm / 20y
Colour Package (pcs.) Catalogue number

141

www.elmarkgroup.eu

black 10 51001

white 10 51005

red 10 51002

blue 10 51006

yellow/green 10 51004

Clips for cable fixing

Type

CHR-4

CHR-5

CHR-6

CHR-7

CHR-8

CHR-9

CHR-10

CHR-12

CHR-14

CHR-16

Catalogue number

10

12

14

16

500004

500005

500006

500007

500008

500009

500010

500012

500014

500016

Cable ties
Length (mm) Width (mm)

100 2.5

150 2.5

160 2.5

200 2.5

250 3.5

280 3.5

300 3.5

300 4.8

370 3.5

380 4.8

450 4.8

500 7.9

Catalogue number 500100 white Catalogue number black

500152 500162 500202 500253 500283 500303 500304 500373 500384 500454 500507 500151 500161 500251 500281 500301 500501

K4

142

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cable tags sets
TYPE Section (mm) Number in a roller Catalogue number TYPE

Consumatives and cable terminals Consumatives

Section (mm)

Number in a roller Catalogue number

EC-0-0 EC-0-1 EC-0-2 EC-0-3 EC-0-4 EC-0-5 EC-0-6 EC-0-7 EC-0-8 EC-0-9

1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

318000 318001 318002 318003 318004 318005 318006 318007 318008 318009

EC-0-a EC-0-b EC-0-R EC-0-S EC-0-T EC-0-N EC-0-P EC-0- EC-0- EC-0-B EC-0-C EC-0-Q

1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

31800a 31800b 31800R 31800S 31800T 31800N 31800P 31800E 31800A 31800B 31800C 31800Q

TYPE

Section (mm)

Number in a roller Catalogue number

TYPE

Section (mm)

Number in a roller Catalogue number

EC-1-0 EC-1-1 EC-1-2 EC-1-3 EC-1-4 EC-1-5 EC-1-6 EC-1-7 EC-1-8 EC-1-9

2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

318010 318011 318012 318013 318014 318015 318016 318017 318018 318019

EC-1-a EC-1-b EC-1-R EC-1-S EC-1-T EC-1-N EC-1-P EC-1- EC-1- EC-1-B EC-1-C EC-1-Q

2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

31801a 31801b 31801R 31801S 31801T 31801N 31801P 31801E 31801A 31801B 31801C 31801Q

TYPE

Section (mm)

Number in a roller Catalogue number

TYPE

Section (mm)

Number in a roller Catalogue number

EC-2-0 EC-2-1 EC-2-2 EC-2-3 EC-2-4 EC-2-5 EC-2-6 EC-2-7 EC-2-8 EC-2-9

3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2

500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

318020 318021 318022 318023 318024 318025 318026 318027 318028 318029

EC-2-a EC-2-b EC-2-R EC-2-S EC-2-T EC-2-N EC-2-P EC-2- EC-2- EC-2-B EC-2-C EC-2-Q

3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2

500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

31802a 31802b 31802R 31802S 31802T 31802N 31802P 31802E 31802A 31802B 31802C 31802Q

K5
TYPE Section (mm) Number in a roller Catalogue number TYPE Section (mm) Number in a roller Catalogue number

EC-3-0 EC-3-1 EC-3-2 EC-3-3 EC-3-4 EC-3-5 EC-3-6 EC-3-7 EC-3-8 EC-3-9

5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2

250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250

318030 318031 318032 318033 318034 318035 318036 318037 318038 318039

EC-3-a EC-3-b EC-3-R EC-3-S EC-3-T EC-3-N EC-3-P EC-3- EC-3- EC-3-B EC-3-C EC-3-Q

5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2

250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250

31803a 31803b 31803R 31803S 31803T 31803N 31803P 31803E 31803A 31803B 31803C 31803Q

Consumatives and cable terminals Terminal blocks

Fixed terminal blocks Series fixed terminal blocks with universal application in electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail mounting. Variety of sizes for optimum using of the space in the distribution boxes through selection of appropriate terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of non-flammable insulating polymeric material.

143

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1

Section of the conductor (mm2)
single-core multiple-core

Size of the terminal (mm) L H W

In ()

Un (V)

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

0.2-4

0.2-2.5 42.5 47

5.2

32

800

grey red black blue

LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N

31033 31032 31031 31035

"...6"

8mm

Section of the conductor (mm2)

single-core multiple-core

Size of the terminal (mm) L H W

In ()

Un (V)

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

0.2-6

0.2-4

42.5

47

6.2

41

800

grey red black blue

LTU2UK 5N LTU2UK 5N LTU2UK 5N LTU2UK 5N

31053 31052 31051 31055

"...6"

8mm

Section of the conductor (mm2)

single-core multiple-core

Size of the terminal (mm) L H W

In ()

Un (V)

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

0.2-10

0.2-6 42.5

47

8.2

57

800

grey red black blue

LTU2UK 6N LTU2UK 6N LTU2UK 6N LTU2UK 6N

31063 31062 31061 31065

K5

"...8"

10mm

Section of the conductor (mm2)

single-core multiple-core

Size of the terminal (mm) L H W

In ()

Un (V)

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

0.5-16 0.5-10

42.5

47

10.2

76

800

grey red black blue

LTU2UK 10N LTU2UK 10N LTU2UK 10N LTU2UK 10N

31103 31102 31101 31105

"...10"

12mm

Section of the conductor (mm2)

single-core multiple-core

Size of the terminal (mm) L H W

In ()

Un (V)

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

2.5-25 10-35

4-16 10-35
"...10"

42.5 55

47 62

12.2 15.2

101 125
12mm

800 800

grey grey
"...10"

LTU2UIK 16 LTU2UIK 35

31163 31353
16mm

144

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Consumatives and cable terminals Terminal blocks

LTU2 UK JD series Series double-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect earthing conductors. Two-colour insulation (yellow and green). Made of non-flammable insulating polymeric material.
Type number Section of the conductor (mm2)
single-core multiple-core

Size of the terminal (mm) L H W

In ()

Un (V)

Colour

Catalogue number

5JD 6JD 10JD 16JD 35JD

"...10"

0.2-4 0.2-10 0.5-10 2.5-25 2.5-35

0.2-4 0.2-6 0.5-6

42.5 42.5 42.5

47 47 47 47 47

6.2 8.2 8.2 12.2 15

16mm

34 37 61 108 135

800 800 800 800 800

yellow-green yellow-green yellow-green yellow-green yellow-green

31054 31064 31104 31164 31354

Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1

2.5-16 42.5 2.5-35 42.5

Accessories for fixed terminal blocks marking tags ZB type Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, voltage and fixing of elements for DIN-rail mounting.
Type number Number of tags in a strip

Colour

Size (mm)

Catalogue number

ZB6 ZB8

20 10

white white

6 8

31906 31908

End cover
Type number Colour Thickness (mm) Catalogue number

EC

grey

1.5

31901

K5
Fixing terminal E/UK type
Type number Colour Thickness (mm) Catalogue number

/UK

grey

31902

Terminal blocks TBH type

Type number Number of tags in a strip In () Un (V) Colour Section of the conductor (mm2) Catalogue number

TBH 3A TBH 6A TBH 10A TBH 15A TBH 20A

10 10 10 10 10

3 6 10 15 20

660 660 660 660 660

semi-transparent semi-transparent semi-transparent white white

up to 1.5 up to 4 up to 6 up to 6 up to 10

31003 31006 31010 31015 31020

Consumatives and cable terminals Thermal shrinkable tubes

Thermal shrinkable tubes ZDG type

145

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The thin wall thermal shrinkable tubes are used for cable connections insulation, at conductors repair to protect the cable head from corrosion, for protection of the cable insulation from water and moisture, for restoring the cable insulation integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe which at temperature higher than 120C shrinks its initial diameter to a certain degree. The material has high temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material represents the so called permanently netted plastic. This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed with the help of high energy electron rays so that inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are formed. After that the pipe is heated to the boiling point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then the pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules stay in the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long time. Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to the given cable) the crystals melt again but due to the net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and take the form of the cable, pressing it and not allowing the moisture to get under the pipe. Standard: EN 60 684 Technical data: * Material: threefold netted polyene * Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, white * Contraction degree: min 2 : 1 * Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100C * Contraction temperature: min 120C * Flame wear resistance: burns faintly * It does not liberate harmful substances * Insulation resistance: 1 10 1 2 /cm * Application: general * Insulating voltage 1000 V

D1 (mm)

D2 (mm)

S (mm)

Quantity (m)

Catalogue number * blue, red, black, green, yellow, yellow-green

1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150

0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 9.0 10 11 12.5 14 15 16.5 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 75

0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08

200 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

301001x 301115x 301002x 301003x 301004x 301005x 301006x 301007x 301008x 301009x 301010x 301011x 301012x 301013x 301014x 301015x 301016x 301018x 301020x 301022x 301025x 301028x 301030x 301035x 301040x 301050x 301060x 301070x 301080x 301090x 301100x 301120x 301150x

K6

Note: * At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the colour must be added: B blue; R red; K black; G - green; Y yellow; V yellow-green

146

Electrical switches and sockets "RHYME

10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A

Scheme

White metallic

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

Sch.1 Sch.6 Sch.7

11011 11021

10 10

Sch.1 Sch.6 Sch.7

11012 11022

10 10

Sch.1 Sch.6 Sch.7

11013 11023

10 10

Sch.1 Sch.6 Sch.7

11016 11026

10 10

Sch.1 Sch.6 Sch.7

11014 11024

10 10

Sch.1 Sch.6 Sch.7

11015 11025

10 10

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

Scheme

White metallic

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

Sch.5

11041

10

Sch.5

11042

10

Sch.5

11043

10

Sch.5

11046

10

Sch.5

11044

10

Sch.5

11045

10

400W

400W

400W

400W

400W

400W

L1

Scheme dimmer

White metallic

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11191

10

dimmer

11192

10

dimmer

11193

10

dimmer

11196

10

dimmer

11194

10

dimmer

11195

10

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

Scheme door bell

White metallic

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11181

10 10 10

door bell

11182

10

door bell

11183

10 10

door bell

11186

10

door bell

11184

10

door bell

11185

10

door bell 11181 with sign push 11181C button

push button

11182C

10

push button

11183C

10

push button

11186C

10

door bell 11184 with sign push 11184C button

10

push button

11185C

10

Electrical switches and sockets "RHYME

16A 16A 16A 16A

147

www.elmarkgroup.eu
16A 16A

L3

Scheme
German type socket

White metallic

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

11211

10

German type socket

11212

10

German type socket

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11213

10

German type socket

11216

10

German type socket

11214

10

German type socket

11215

10

Scheme
Phone socket Computer socket TV

White metallic

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11261 11281 11251

10 10 10

Phone socket Computer socket TV

11262 11282 11252

10 10 10

Phone socket Computer socket TV

11263 11283 11253

10 10 10

Phone socket Computer socket TV

11266 11286 11256

10 10 10

Phone socket Computer socket TV

11264 11284 11254

10 10 10

Phone socket Computer socket TV

11265 11285 11255

10 10 10

Scheme
Insert key power switch

White metallic

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

11331

10

Insert key power switch

11332

10

Insert key power switch

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

L1

11333

10

Insert key power switch

11336

10

Insert key power switch

11334

10

Insert key power switch

11335

10

Panel Double Triple

White metallic

Package (pcs)

Panel Champagne Package metallic (pcs) Double Triple

Panel Double Triple

Gold metallic

Package Panel (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Panel (pcs)

Grey metallic

Package (pcs)

Panel Double Triple

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11551 11661

10 10

11552 11662

10 10

11553 11663

10 10

Double Triple

11556 11666

10 10

Double Triple

11554 11664

10 10

11555 11665

10 10

148

www.elmarkgroup.eu
Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue

Electrical switches and sockets Panels Splendor

WHITE single 06301 40 single with cover 0629 20 double 06311 40 CHROME single 063010 40 double 063110 40 SILVER GRAY single 06302 40 double 06312 40 YELLOW single 06304 40 double 06314 40 PEAR-TREE single 06305 40 double 06315 40 GOLDEN single 063011 40 double 063111 40 BORDO single 06307 40 double 06317 40 CHERRY-TREE single 06306 40 double 06316 40 BLACK single 06303 40 single with cover 1629 20 double 06313 40 ORANGE single 063012 40 double 063112 40 LIGHT BLUE single 06308 40 double 06318 40 DARK BLUE single 06309 40 double 06319 40 triple 06329 40 triple 06328 40 triple 063212 40 triple 06323 40 triple 06326 40 triple 06327 40 triple 063211 40 triple 06325 40 triple 06324 40 triple 06322 40 triple 063210 40 triple 06321 40

L2

Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs)

Electrical switches and sockets Functional part SPLENDOR

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Catalogue number Package (pcs)

149

www.elmarkgroup.eu

one button one way switch one button two way switch cross switch

10 10 10

white dark gray white dark gray white dark gray

0601 1601 0602 1602 0603 1603

10 10 10

Type

Rated current In (A)

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

two buttons one way switch two buttons one way switch with light / two buttons two way switch
Type

10 10

white dark gray white dark gray

0610 1610 0612 / 0611 1612 / 1611

10 10

Rated current In (A)

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

German type socket

16
Rated current In (A)

white dark gray

Colour

0616 1616
Catalogue number

10
Package (pcs)

Type

one button one way switch with light one button two way switch with light

10 10

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

0606 1606 0607 1607

Catalogue number

10 10

Type

Rated current In (A)

Package (pcs)

Push light button Door bell switch

10 10

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

0605 1605 0609 1609

Catalogue number

10 10

Type

Power (W)

Package (pcs)

Dimmer switch Fan speed switch

350 500

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

0618 1618 0619 1619

Catalogue number

10 10

L2
Type Package (pcs)

RG 11

white dark gray

Colour

0621 1621
Catalogue number

10

Type

Package (pcs)

Phone socket Phone socket double Computer socket RG 45

white dark gray white dark gray white dark gray

0623 1623 06232 16232 0624 1624

10 10 10

Type

Rated current In (A)

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

Insert key power switch

10

white dark gray

0633 1633

10

150

www.elmarkgroup.eu
10A 10A 10A 10A

Electrical switches and sockets "BASIC"

10A 10A

Scheme

White

Package Scheme (pcs)

Beige (crme)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Silver gray

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Blue

Package Scheme (pcs)

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

Sch.1 TG101 Sch.6 TG102 Sch.7 TG115 TG114

Sch.1light

38000 38010 38070 38700

10 10 10 10

Sch.1 TG101 Sch.6 TG102 Sch.7 TG115 TG114

Sch.1light

38001 38011 38071 38701

10 10 10 10

Sch.1 TG101 Sch.6 TG102 Sch.7 TG115 TG114

Sch.1light

38002 38012 38072 38702

10 10 10 10

Sch.1 TG101 Sch.6 TG102 Sch.7 TG115 TG114

Sch.1light

38003 38013 38073 38703

10 10 10 10

Sch.1 TG101 Sch.6 TG102 Sch.7 TG115 TG114

Sch.1light

38004 38014 38074 38704

10 10 10 10

Sch.1 TG101 Sch.6 TG102 Sch.7 TG115 TG114

Sch.1light

38005 38015 38075 38705

10 10 10 10

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

Scheme

White

Package Scheme (pcs)

Beige (crme)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Silver gray

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Blue

Package Scheme (pcs)

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

Sch.5 TG103

38050

10

Sch.5 TG103

38051

10

Sch.5 TG103

38052

10

Sch.5 TG103

38053

10

Sch.5 TG103

38054

10

Sch.5 TG103

38055

10

400W

400W

400W

400W

400W

400W

L3

Scheme dimmer

White

TG111

38800

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

Beige (crme)

TG111

38801

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

Silver gray

TG111

38802

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs) dimmer 38803 10

TG111

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

Blue

TG111

38804

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

TG111

38805

10

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

Scheme
push button

White

Package Scheme (pcs)

Beige (crme)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Silver gray

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Blue

Package Scheme (pcs)

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

TG112A TG112
door bell

38100 38120

10 10

push button

TG112A TG112
door bell

38101 38121

10 10

push button

TG112A TG112
door bell

38102 38122

10 10

push button

TG112A TG112
door bell

38103 38123

10 10

push button

TG112A TG112
door bell

38104 38124

10 10

push button

TG112A TG112
door bell

38105 38125

10 10

Electrical switches and sockets "BASIC"

16A 16A 16A 16A

151

www.elmarkgroup.eu
16A 16A

Scheme
Ger.type

White

Package Scheme (pcs)

Beige (crme)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Silver gray

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Blue

Package Scheme (pcs)

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

TZ107
Ger.type

38200 38250

10 10

Ger.type

TZ107
Ger.type

38201 38251

10 10

Ger.type

TZ107
Ger.type

38202 38252

10 10

Ger.type

TZ107
Ger.type

38203 38253

10 10

Ger.type

TZ107
Ger.type

38204 38254

10 10

Ger.type

TZ107
Ger.type

38205 38255

10 10

TZ107C
with cover

TZ107C
with cover

TZ107C
with cover

TZ107C
with cover

TZ107C
with cover

TZ107C
with cover

Scheme

White

tel. comp.
TZ112 TZ106

Package Scheme (pcs)

38350 38300

10 10

tel.

Beige (crme)

Package Scheme (pcs)

comp.
TZ112

TZ106

38351 38301

10 10

tel.

Silver gray

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs)

comp.
TZ112

TZ106

38352 38302

10 10

tel.

Package Scheme (pcs)

Blue

comp.
TZ112

TZ106

38353 38303

10 10

tel.

Package Scheme (pcs)

comp.
TZ112

TZ106

38354 38304

10 10

tel.

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

comp.
TZ112

TZ106

38355 38305

10 10

Scheme

White

Package Scheme (pcs)

Beige (crme)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Silver gray

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs)

Package Scheme (pcs)

Blue

Package Scheme (pcs)

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

L3

TV
TZ111

38360

10

TV
TZ111

38361

10

TV
TZ111

38362

10

TV
TZ111

38363

10

TV
TZ111

38364

10

TV
TZ111

38365

10

Panel Double Triple

White

Package (pcs)

Panel Double Triple

Beige (crme)

Package (pcs)

Panel Double Triple

Silver gray

Package (pcs)

Panel Double Triple

Graphite dark gray

Package (pcs)

Panel Double Triple

Blue

Package (pcs)

Panel Double Triple

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

38900 38910

10 10

38901 38911

10 10

38902 38912

10 10

38903 38913

10 10

38904 38914

10 10

38905 38915

10 10

152

www.elmarkgroup.eu
PANELS
Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs)

Electrical switches and sockets Panels and frames "LIFE STYLE"

single 34601 40 WHITE double triple 34613 40 34625 40 CHROME single 34609 40 double 34621 40 triple 34633 40 SILVER GRAY single 34610 40 double 34622 40 triple 34634 40 YELLOW single 34602 40 double 34614 40 triple 34626 40 PEAR-TREE single 34611 40 double 34623 40 triple 34635 40 GOLDEN triple 34632 40 BORDO single 34606 40 double 34618 40 triple 34630 40 quadruple 34642 35
Console Catalogue Package (pcs) Console box for bricks and concrete Console box for hollow-wall triple quadruple sixfold 24203 71304 68206 10 10 10 triple quadruple sixfold 24205 24206 10 10

quadruple 34637 35

sixfold 34660 35

quadruple 34645 35

quadruple 34646 35

sixfold 34662 35
Frame Catalogue Package (pcs)

double triple quadruple sixfold 24262 10 24201 10 24202 10 24206F 10

quadruple 34638 35

* Single switch or socket use triple frame

quadruple 34647 35

single 34608 40

double 34620 40

quadruplle 34644 35

Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue

single 34162 40

CHERRY-TREE double triple quadruple 34624 40 34636 40 34648 35

* Single, double or triple swich or socket use triple console

L4

Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs) Colour Type Catalogue Package(pcs)

single 34607 40

double 34619 40

DARK GRAY triple quadruple 34631 40 GREEN triple 34627 40 LIGHT BLUE 34643 35

sixfold 34661 35

single 34603 40

double 34615 40

quadruple 34639 35

single 34605 40

double 34617 40

triple 34629 40 DARK BLUE

quadruple 34641 35
Box Catalogue Package (pcs) Surface mounting box double triple quadruple 2702 2703 10 10 Watertight box triple quadruple sixfold 22451 22461 10 10

single 34604 40

double 34616 40

triple 34628 40

quadruple 34640 35

Electrical switches and sockets Functional part LIFE STYLE

Type Rated current In (A) Colour Catalogue number Package (pcs)

153

www.elmarkgroup.eu

one button one way switch cross switch

Type

16 16
Rated current In (A)

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

20501 21501 20579 21579

Catalogue number

4 4
Package (pcs)

one button two way switch one button two way switch with light
Type

16 16
Rated current In (A)

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

20506 21506 20507 21507

Catalogue number

4 4
Package (pcs)

door bell switch with light push button with light

Type

10 10
Rated current In (A)

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

20510A 21510A 20510B 21510B

Catalogue number

4 4
Package (pcs)

curtain switch

10

white dark gray

20521 21521

Type

Power (W)

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

dimmer switch fan speed switch

Type

500 500
Power (VA)

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

20803 21803 20803A 21803A

Catalogue number

8 8
Package (pcs)

bell 230V

white dark gray

20616 21616

Type

Rated current In (A)

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

German type socket

16

white dark gray

20265 21265

Type

Rated current In (A)

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

Italian standard multi socket

16

white dark gray

20203 21203

L4

Type

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

TV antenna socket

RG 11

white dark gray

20228 21228

Type

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

phone socket computer socket

Type

RG 45
Rated current In (A)

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

20251 21251 20266 21266

Catalogue number

4 4
Package (pcs)

decorative switch

white dark gray

20056 21056

10

154

www.elmarkgroup.eu
MAK-2A with thermal protection
Model Package (pcs) Cable specification

Consumatives and cable terminals Multiplugs and cable reels

Cable length

Catalogue number

H05VV-F

10

3 x 1.5mm2

10m

47911

A1

MAK-3 with thermal protection

Model Package (pcs) Cable specification Cable length Catalogue number

H05VV-F H05VV-F

4 4

3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm
2

20m 25m

47921 47925

MAK-4 with thermal protection

Model Package (pcs) Cable specification Cable length Catalogue number

H05VV-F H05VV-F H05VV-F

2 2 2

3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm
2

25m 40m 50m

47927 47940 47950

3 x 1.5mm2

K7

DG - D03B / DG - D04B
Model Cable specification Cable length Catalogue number

H05VV-F (DG-D03B) H05VV-F (DG-D03B) H05VV-F (DG-D03B) H05VV-F (DG-D04B) H05VV-F (DG-D04B) H05VV-F (DG-D04B) Max.3500W,16/250~

3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2

1.5m 3.0m 5.0m 1.5m 3.0m 5.0m

47031 47080 47081 47041 47082 47083

DG - D05B / DG - D06B
Model Cable specification Cable length Catalogue number

H05VV-F (DG-D05B) H05VV-F (DG-D05B) H05VV-F (DG-D05B) H05VV-F (DG-D06B) H05VV-F (DG-D06B) H05VV-F (DG-D06B) Max.3500W,16/250~

3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2

1.5m 3.0m 5.0m 1.5m 3.0m 5.0m

47051 47053 47055 47061 47063 47065

Notes
www.elmarkgroup.eu

155

156

ELMARKs participation in technical exhibitions

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Hannover Messe 2008, Germany

ELMARK sample boards in business centers

www.elmarkgroup.eu

157

Board 1

Board 2

Board 3

Board switches

158

Service and maintenance

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELMARK HOLDING SC offers wide range of services to answer the clients requirements completely and thoroughly. In order to improve the service quality ELMARK HOLDING has opened: E-mail: [email protected]; tel. +359 52 575 500; fax +359 52 575 501
to receive claims, advice, questions and orders for services. * ELMARK HOLDING SC provides guarantee and post-guarantee maintenance to all products. * Repair or replacement of damaged devices in guarantee or post-guarantee period. * Each letter could be sent in the language preferred by the client. * The guarantee of the products is valid at adherence to the specifications for mounting and exploitation. ELMARK HOLDING SC has started engineering services as well. * Making of boards at clients documentation projects. * Appurtenances mounting in industrial projects. * Recommendation for modernization and reconstruction of outdated devices. * Choice of suitable current leakage protection in order to improve the safety of the staff. * Defining the power supply voltage quality and the consumed capacity. * Harmonic analysis of the power supply voltage and studying the possibilities for failure lessening. Calculating smoothing filters. * Capacity factor measuring and calculating the necessary capacitor batteries. Cutting down the energy losses and improving the quality of the supplied electrical energy. To connect the engineering department you can refer to:

e-mail: [email protected] or phone +359 89 666 88 01, fax +359 58 66 25 25

ELMARK HOLDING SC
BULGARIA, VARNA ZPZ, 10 Perla Str. Tel. +359 52 57 55 00 Fax +359 52 57 55 01 E-mail: [email protected] ELMARK FACTORY IN EUROPE ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC BULGARIA, DOBRICH 2 Dobrudja Blvd. Tel./Fax +359 58 66 25 25 E-mail: [email protected]

GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BULGARIA ELMARK GROUP - BULGARIA LTD BULGARIA, VARNA ZPZ, 10 Perla Str. Tel. +359 52 57 55 55 Fax +359 52 57 55 80 E-mail: [email protected] BULGARIA, SOFIA 160 Geo Milev Blvd. Tel./Fax +359 2 971 15 60 / 61 E-mail: [email protected] BULGARIA, PLOVDIV 180 Brezovsko Shose, warehouse No. 25 Tel./Fax +359 32 968 210 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR GREECE ANASTASIADI S.A. GREECE, THESSALONIKI 4, G. Drossini Str., Kordelio Tel. +30 2310 700250 Fax +30 2310 707577 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CYPRUS HLEKTRAPOTHIKI L.T.D. CYPRUS, PAFOS 3, Kalamatas Str. Tel. +357 26 937 726 GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA STANEX DOO BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, ZENICA 17 KRALJA TVRTKA I Str. Tel. +387 32 444 040 / 050 / 060 E-mail: [email protected] ELIM DOO BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, LAKTAI Shushniaari Str. Tel. +387 51 586 000 Fax +387 51 586 060 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MONTENEGRO TRGOTEHNA DOO MONTENEGRO, NIKSHICH 10 Zarka Zrenjanina Str. Tel./Fax +381 83 246 056 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MACEDONIA PIT KOM DOOEL MACEDONIA, NEGOTINO 120 Dame Gruev Str. Tel. +389 43 370 287 Fax +389 43 370 282 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR IRAN ARMAN SORENA CO IRAN, TEHRAN First fl.-No15-4th Alley-Bokharest St.Dr.Beheshti Ave. Tel. +98 21 88 73 31 91 GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SOUTH AFRICA VIKELA SYSTEMS (PTY) LTD. Tel. +27 11 452 74 56 Fax +27 11 452 85 31 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR FRANCE BEAUVILLIER J.PIERRE FRANCE, St Germain du Teil Tel. +334 663 23 782 Fax +334 663 23 458

www.elmarkgroup.eu
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ROMANIA ELMARK GRUP SRL ROMANIA, BUCHAREST 8 Bucuresti Urziceni Str. Tel. +40 21 351 54 81 / 82 Fax +40 21 351 54 83 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SERBIA ELMARK GRUP DOO SERBIA, KRAGUJEVAC 4 Drage Todorovich Str. Tel. +381 34 311 777 Fax +381 34 311 778 E-mail: [email protected] SERBIA, BELGRADE Zemun - Altina 54 Ugrinovachki put Str. Mobile +381 63 114 77 82 Tel./Fax +381 11 316 39 50 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CROATIA STIMO DOO CROATIA, BJELOVAR 8 Hrvatskog proljeca Str. Tel./Fax +385 43 212 211 Tel./Fax +385 43 225 114 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR HUNGARY ELEKTRO PROFI COMMERCIAL LTD. HUNGARY, BUDAPEST 3 Albertirsai Str. Tel. +36 1 460 61 40 Fax +36 1 460 61 41 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR JORDAN SOFIA IMPORT&EXPORT EST. JORDAN, AMMAN SHAFA BARDAN - ASP UNIVERSITY CIRCLE PRINCE TATAL BIN MOHAMMAD STR. Tel. +962 7 77 749649 Fax +962 6 53 38589 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SRI LANKA ATTOTECH SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (PVT) LTD. SRI LANKA, BALLUMMAHARA, Mudungoda, No: 72, Kandy Road Tel. +943 34 674 803 Fax +943 34 674 802 E-mail: [email protected] GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ISRAEL TAMHASH LTD ISRAEL, RISHON LE ZION 21 Moshe Sharet St., P.O.B 5038 75151 Tel. +972 3 9611288 Fax +972 3 9616270 / 5747 E-mail: [email protected]